Modulators of proteolysis and associated methods of use

The present application is continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/375,643, filed 4 Apr. 2019, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2019/0315732 A1, which claims priority to and the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/652,676, filed 4 Apr. 2018 and titled MODULATORS OF PROTEOLYSIS AND ASSOCIATED METHODS OF USE, each of which are incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/230,354, filed on Aug. 5, 2016, published as Application Publication No. 2017/0065719, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/206,497 filed 11 Jul. 2016, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0008904; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/209,648 filed 13 Jul. 2016, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0037004; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/730,728, filed on Oct. 11, 2017, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0099940; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/686,640, filed on Apr. 14, 2015, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0291562; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/792,414, filed on Jul. 6, 2015, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0058872; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/371,956, filed on Jul. 11, 2014, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0356322; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/074,820, filed on Mar. 18, 2016, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2016/0272639; and U.S. Provisional patent application Ser. No. 15/885,671, filed Jan. 31, 2018, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0215731 A1; and International Patent Application No. PCT/US2016/023258, filed Mar. 18, 2016, published as International Patent Application Publication No. WO2016/149668, are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Furthermore, all references cited herein are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

The description provides bifunctional compounds comprising a target protein binding moiety and an E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety, and associated methods of use. The bifunctional compounds are useful as modulators of targeted ubiquitination, especially with respect to Kirsten ras sarcoma protein (KRas or KRAS), such as mutant or gain-of-function KRas, which are degraded and/or otherwise inhibited by bifunctional compounds according to the present disclosure.

Most small molecule drugs bind enzymes or receptors in tight and well-defined pockets. On the other hand, protein-protein interactions are notoriously difficult to target using small molecules due to their large contact surfaces and the shallow grooves or flat interfaces involved. E3 ubiquitin ligases (of which hundreds are known in humans) confer substrate specificity for ubiquitination, and therefore, are more attractive therapeutic targets than general proteasome inhibitors due to their specificity for certain protein substrates. The development of ligands of E3 ligases has proven challenging, in part due to the fact that they must disrupt protein-protein interactions. However, recent developments have provided specific ligands which bind to these ligases. For example, since the discovery of nutlins, the first small molecule E3 ligase inhibitors, additional compounds have been reported that target E3 ligases but the field remains underdeveloped. For example, since the discovery of Nutlins, the first small molecule E3 ligase mouse double minute 2 homolog (MDM2) inhibitors, additional compounds have been reported that target MDM2 (i.e., human double minute 2 or HDM2) E3 ligases (J. Di, et al. Current Cancer Drug Targets (2011), 11(8), 987-994).

One E3 ligase with exciting therapeutic potential is the von Hippel-Lindau (VHL) tumor suppressor, the substrate recognition subunit of the E3 ligase complex VCB, which also consists of elongins B and C, Cul2 and Rbx1. The primary substrate of VHL is Hypoxia Inducible Factor 1α (HIF-1α), a transcription factor that upregulates genes such as the pro-angiogenic growth factor VEGF and the red blood cell inducing cytokine erythropoietin in response to low oxygen levels. The first small molecule ligands of Von Hippel Lindau (VHL) to the substrate recognition subunit of the E3 ligase were generated, and crystal structures were obtained confirming that the compound mimics the binding mode of the transcription factor HIF-1α, the major substrate of VHL.

Cereblon is a protein that in humans is encoded by the CRBN gene. CRBN orthologs are highly conserved from plants to humans, which underscores its physiological importance. Cereblon forms an E3 ubiquitin ligase complex with damaged DNA binding protein 1 (DDB1), Cullin-4A (CUL4A), and regulator of cullins 1 (ROC1). This complex ubiquitinates a number of other proteins. Through a mechanism which has not been completely elucidated, cereblon ubquitination of target proteins results in increased levels of fibroblast growth factor 8 (FGF8) and fibroblast growth factor 10 (FGF10). FGF8 in turn regulates a number of developmental processes, such as limb and auditory vesicle formation. The net result is that this ubiquitin ligase complex is important for limb outgrowth in embryos. In the absence of cereblon, DDB1 forms a complex with DDB2 that functions as a DNA damage-binding protein.

Inhibitors of Apotosis Proteins (IAPs) are a protein family involved in suppressing apoptosis, i.e. cell death. The human IAP family includes 8 members, and numerous other organisms contain IAP homologs. IAPs contain an E3 ligase specific domain and baculoviral IAP repeat (BIR) domains that recognize substrates, and promote their ubiquitination. IAPs promote ubiquitination and can directly bind and inhibit caspases. Caspases are proteases (e.g. caspase-3, caspase-7 and caspace-9) that implement apoptosis. As such, through the binding of caspases, IAPs inhibit cell death. However, pro-apoptotic stimuli can result in the release of mitochondrial proteins DIABLO (also known as second mitrochondria-derived activator of caspases or SMAC) and HTRA2 (also known as Omi). Binding of DIABLO and HTRA2 appears to block IAP activity.

SMAC interacts with essentially all known IAPs including XIAP, c-IAP1, c-IAP2, NIL-IAP, Bruce, and survivin. The first four amino acids (AVPI) of mature SMAC bind to a portion of IAN, which is believed to be essential for blocking the anti-apoptotic effects of IAPs.

Bifunctional compounds such as those that are described in U.S. Patent Application Publications 2015-0291562 and 2014-0356322 (incorporated herein by reference), function to recruit endogenous proteins to an E3 ubiquiuin ligase for degradation. In particular, the publications describe bifunctional or proteolysis targeting chimeric (PROTAC) compounds, which find utility as modulators of targeted ubiquitination of a variety of polypeptides and other proteins, which are then degraded and/or otherwise inhibited by the bifunctional compounds.

The Kirsten rat sarcoma (KRAS) gene is an oncogene encoding KRas, which is a small GTPase signal transduction protein. Ras proteins associate with the plasma membrane, and act as switches in the transduction of extracellular signals to intracellular response, thereby regulating, e.g., cell division. Numerous activating or gain-of-function mutations of the KRas gene are known, and in fact, KRas is the most frequently mutated gene in cancer. Gain-in-function KRas mutations are found in approximately 30% of all human cancers, including, e.g., pancreatic cancer (>80%), colon cancer (approximately 40-50%), lung cancer (approximately 30-50%), non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, and breast cancer. These activating mutations impair the ability of KRas to switch between active and inactive states. Key roles for mutant KRas have been established in initiation, maintenance, progression, and metastasis of various cancers, and mutations are frequently correlated with poor prognosis and increased resistance to chemotherapy and biological therapies, including, e.g., therapies that target epidermal growth factor receptor. However, in spite of its key role and high rates prevalence in cancer, there is an absence of effective therapies that directly target this oncogene, leading to it being considered “undruggable.”

Thus, an ongoing need exists in the art for effective treatments for disease associated with overexpression, aggregation, and/or overactivation of KRas (e.g., the aggregation of active KRas), such as a gain-of-function KRas mutant (i.e., a KRas having a gain-of-function mutation). However, non-specific effects, and the inability to target and modulate mutant KRas, remain as obstacles to the development of effective treatments. As such, small-molecule therapeutic agents that target KRas and that leverage or potentiate VHL's, cereblon's, MDM2's, and IAPs' substrate specificity would be very useful.

The present disclosure describes bifunctional compounds which function to recruit endogenous proteins to an E3 ubiquitin ligase for degradation, and methods of using the same. In particular, the present disclosure provides bifunctional or proteolysis targeting chimeric (PROTAC) compounds, which find utility as modulators of targeted ubiquitination of a variety of polypeptides and other proteins, which are then degraded and/or otherwise inhibited by the bifunctional compounds as described herein. An advantage of the compounds provided herein is that a broad range of pharmacological activities is possible, consistent with the degradation/inhibition of targeted polypeptides from virtually any protein class or family. In addition, the description provides methods of using an effective amount of the compounds as described herein for the treatment or amelioration of a disease condition, such as cancer, e.g., pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, and breast cancer.

As such, in one aspect the disclosure provides bifunctional or PROTAC compounds, which comprise an E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (i.e., a ligand for an E3 ubquitin ligase or “ULM” group), and a moiety that binds a target protein (i.e., a protein/polypeptide targeting ligand or “PTM” group) such that the target protein/polypeptide (e.g., Kirsten rat sarcoma protein (KRas or KRAS) and/or mutant KRas, such as KRas G12C ) is placed in proximity to the ubiquitin ligase to effect degradation (and inhibition) of that protein. In a preferred embodiment, the ULM (ubiquitination ligase modulator) can be Von Hippel-Lindau E3 ubiquitin ligase (VHL) binding moiety (VLM), or a cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (CLM), or a mouse double miniute 2 homolog (MDM2) E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (MLM), or an IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (i.e., a “ILM”). For example, the structure of the bifunctional compound can be depicted as:

The respective positions of the PTM and ULM moieties (e.g., VLM, CLM, MLM or ILM) as well as their number as illustrated herein is provided by way of example only and is not intended to limit the compounds in any way. As would be understood by the skilled artisan, the bifunctional compounds as described herein can be synthesized such that the number and position of the respective functional moieties can be varied as desired.

In certain embodiments, the bifunctional compound further comprises a chemical linker (“L”). In this example, the structure of the bifunctional compound can be depicted as:

where PTM is a protein/polypeptide targeting moiety, L is a linker, e.g., a bond or a chemical group coupling PTM to ULM, and ULM is a IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (ILM), or a Von Hippel-Lindau E3 ubiquitin ligase (VHL) binding moiety (VLM), or a cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (CLM), or a mouse double minute 2 homolog (MDM2) E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (MLM).

For example, the structure of the bifunctional compound can be depicted as:

wherein: PTM is a protein/polypeptide targeting moiety; “L” is a linker (e.g. a bond or a chemical linker group) coupling the PTM and at least one of VLM, CLM, MLM, ILM, or a combination thereof; VLM is Von Hippel-Lindau E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety that binds to VHL E3 ligase; CLM is cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety that binds to cereblon; MLM is an MDM2 E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety that bind MDM2; and ILM is a IAP binding moiety that binds to IAP.

In certain preferred embodiments, the ILM is an AVPI tetrapeptide fragment. As such, in certain additional embodiments, the ILM of the bifunctional compound comprises the amino acids alanine (A), valine (V), proline (P), and isoleucine (I) or their unnatural mimetics, respectively. In additional embodiments, the amino acids of the AVPI tetrapeptide fragment are connected to each other thorugh amide bonds (i.e., —C(O)NH— or —NHC(O)—).

In certain embodiments, the compounds as described herein comprise multiple independently selected ULMs, multiple PTMs, multiple chemical linkers or a combination thereof.

In certain embodiments, ILM comprises chemical moieties such as those described herein.

In additional embodiments, VLM can be hydroxyproline or a derivative thereof. Furthermore, other contemplated VLMs are included in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/03022523, which as discussed above, is incorporated herein in its entirety.

In an embodiment, the CLM comprises a chemical group derived from an imide, a thioimide, an amide, or a thioamide. In a particular embodiment, the chemical group is a phthalimido group, or an analog or derivative thereof. In a certain embodiment, the CLM is thalidomide, lenalidomide, pomalidomide, analogs thereof, isosteres thereof, or derivatives thereof. Other contemplated CLMs are described in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0291562, which is incorporated herein in its entirety.

In certain embodiments, MLM can be nutlin or a derivative thereof. Furthermore, other contemplated MLMs are included in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/206,497 filed 11 Jul. 2016, published as U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0008904, which as discussed above, is incorporated herein in its entirety. In certain additional embodiments, the MLM of the bifunctional compound comprises chemical moieties such as substituted imidazolines, substituted spiro-indolinones, substituted pyrrolidines, substituted piperidinones, substituted morpholinones, substituted pyrrolopyrimidines, substituted imidazolopyridines, substituted thiazoloimidazoline, substituted pyrrolopyrrolidinones, and substituted isoquinolinones.

In additional embodiments, the MLM comprises the core structures mentioned above with adjacent bis-aryl substitutions positioned as cis- or trans-configurations.

In certain embodiments, “L” is a bond. In additional embodiments, the linker “L” is a connector with a linear non-hydrogen atom number in the range of 1 to 20. The connector “L” can contain, but not limited to the functional groups such as ether, amide, alkane, alkene, alkyne, ketone, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid, thioether, sulfoxide, and sulfone. The linker can contain aromatic, heteroaromatic, cyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic moieties. Substitution with halogen, such as Cl, F, Br and I can be included in the linker. In the case of fluorine substitution, single or multiple fluorines can be included.

In certain embodiments, VLM is a derivative of trans-3-hydroxyproline, where both nitrogen and carboxylic acid in trans-3-hydroxyproline are functionalized as amides.

In certain embodiments, CLM is a derivative of piperidine-2,6-dione, where piperidine-2,6-dione can be substituted at the 3-position, and the 3-substitution can be bicyclic hetero-aromatics with the linkage as C—N bond or C—C bond. Examples of CLM can be, but not limited to, pomalidomide, lenalidomide and thalidomide and their derivatives.

In an additional aspect, the description provides therapeutic compositions comprising an effective amount of a compound as described herein or salt form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The therapeutic compositions modulate protein degradation and/or inhibition in a patient or subject, for example, an animal such as a human, and can be used for treating or ameliorating disease states or conditions which are modulated through the degraded/inhibited protein. In certain embodiments, the therapeutic compositions as described herein may be used to effectuate the degradation of proteins of interest for the treatment or amelioration of a disease, e.g., cancer (such as pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, or non-small cell lung cancer). In yet another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method of ubiquitinating/degrading a target protein in a cell. In certain embodiments, the method comprises administering a bifunctional compound as described herein comprising an ILM and a PTM, a PTM and a VLM, or a PTM and a CLM, or a PTM and a MLM, preferably linked through a linker moiety, as otherwise described herein, wherein the VLM/ILM/CLM/MLM is coupled to the PTM through a linker to target protein that binds to PTM for degradation. Similarly, the PTM can be coupled to VLM or CLM or MLM or ILM through a linker to target a protein or polypeptide for degradation. Degradation of the target protein will occur when the target protein is placed in proximity to the E3 ubiquitin ligase, thus resulting in degradation/inhibition of the effects of the target protein and the control of protein levels. The control of protein levels afforded by the present disclosure provides treatment of a disease state or condition, which is modulated through the target protein by lowering the level of that protein in the cells of a patient.

In still another aspect, the description provides methods for treating or ameliorating a disease, disorder or symptom thereof in a subject or a patient, e.g., an animal such as a human, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a composition comprising an effective amount, e.g., a therapeutically effective amount, of a compound as described herein or salt form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, wherein the composition is effective for treating or ameliorating the disease or disorder or symptom thereof in the subject.

In another aspect, the description provides methods for identifying the effects of the degradation of proteins of interest in a biological system using compounds according to the present disclosure.

The preceding general areas of utility are given by way of example only and are not intended to be limiting on the scope of the present disclosure and appended claims. Additional objects and advantages associated with the compositions, methods, and processes of the present disclosure will be appreciated by one of ordinary skill in the art in light of the instant claims, description, and examples. For example, the various aspects and embodiments of the disclosure may be utilized in numerous combinations, all of which are expressly contemplated by the present description. These additional aspects and embodiments are expressly included within the scope of the present disclosure. The publications and other materials used herein to illuminate the background of the disclosure, and in particular cases, to provide additional details respecting the practice, are incorporated by reference.

The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated into and form a part of the specification, illustrate several embodiments of the present disclosure and, together with the description, serve to explain the principles of the disclosure. The drawings are only for the purpose of illustrating an embodiment of the disclosure and are not to be construed as limiting the disclosure. Further objects, features and advantages of the disclosure will become apparent from the following detailed description taken in conjunction with the accompanying figures showing illustrative embodiments of the disclosure, in which:

FIGS. 1 A and 1 B . Illustration of general principle for PROTAC function. (A) Exemplary PROTACs comprise a protein targeting moiety (PTM; darkly shaded rectangle), a ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (ULM; lightly shaded triangle), and optionally a linker moiety (L; black line) coupling or tethering the PTM to the ULM. (B) Illustrates the functional use of the PROTACs as described herein. Briefly, the ULM recognizes and binds to a specific E3 ubiquitin ligase, and the PTM binds and recruits a target protein bringing it into close proximity to the E3 ubiquitin ligase. Typically, the E3 ubiquitin ligase is complexed with an E2 ubiquitin-conjugating protein, and either alone or via the E2 protein catalyzes attachment of ubiquitin (dark circles) to a lysine on the target protein via an isopeptide bond. The poly-ubiquitinated protein (far right) is then targeted for degradation by the proteosomal machinery of the cell.

FIGS. 2 A and 2 B . FIG. 2 A is a Western blot showing a potent degrader, exemplary compound 399. FIG. 2 B is a Western blot showing a less potent degrader, exemplary compound 432. Both compounds covalently modify KRas G12C , as seen by the gel shift.

The following is a detailed description provided to aid those skilled in the art in practicing the present disclosure. Those of ordinary skill in the art may make modifications and variations in the embodiments described herein without departing from the spirit or scope of the present disclosure. All publications, patent applications, patents, figures and other references mentioned herein are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety.

Presently described are compositions and methods that relate to the surprising and unexpected discovery that an E3 ubiquitin ligase protein (e.g., inhibitors of apoptosis proteins (IAP), a Von Hippel-Lindau E3 ubiquitin ligase (VHL), a cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase, or a mouse double minute 2 homolog (MDM2) E3 ubiquitin ligase) ubiquitinates a target protein once it and the target protein are placed in proximity by a bifunctional or chimeric construct that binds the E3 ubiquitin ligase protein and the target protein. Accordingly the present disclosure provides such compounds and compositions comprising an E3 ubiquintin ligase binding moiety (“ULM”) coupled to a protein target binding moiety (“PTM”), which result in the ubiquitination of a chosen target protein, which leads to degradation of the target protein by the proteasome (see FIG. 1 ). The present disclosure also provides a library of compositions and the use thereof.

In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides compounds which comprise a ligand, e.g., a small molecule ligand (i.e., having a molecular weight of below 2,000, 1,000, 500, or 200 Daltons), which is capable of binding to a ubiquitin ligase, such as IAP, VHL, MDM2, or cereblon. The compounds also comprise a moiety that is capable of binding to target protein, in such a way that the target protein is placed in proximity to the ubiquitin ligase to effect degradation (and/or inhibition) of that protein. Small molecule can mean, in addition to the above, that the molecule is non-peptidyl, that is, it is not generally considered a peptide, e.g., comprises fewer than 4, 3, or 2 amino acids. In accordance with the present description, the PTM, ULM or PROTAC molecule can be a small molecule.

Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. The terminology used in the description is for describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the disclosure.

Where a range of values is provided, it is understood that each intervening value, to the tenth of the unit of the lower limit unless the context clearly dictates otherwise (such as in the case of a group containing a number of carbon atoms in which case each carbon atom number falling within the range is provided), between the upper and lower limit of that range and any other stated or intervening value in that stated range is encompassed within the disclosure. The upper and lower limits of these smaller ranges may independently be included in the smaller ranges is also encompassed within the disclosure, subject to any specifically excluded limit in the stated range. Where the stated range includes one or both of the limits, ranges excluding either both of those included limits are also included in the disclosure.

The following terms are used to describe the present disclosure. In instances where a term is not specifically defined herein, that term is given an art-recognized meaning by those of ordinary skill applying that term in context to its use in describing the present disclosure.

The articles “a” and “an” as used herein and in the appended claims are used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e., to at least one) of the grammatical object of the article unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. By way of example, “an element” means one element or more than one element.

The phrase “and/or,” as used herein in the specification and in the claims, should be understood to mean “either or both” of the elements so conjoined, i.e., elements that are conjunctively present in some cases and disjunctively present in other cases. Multiple elements listed with “and/or” should be construed in the same fashion, i.e., “one or more” of the elements so conjoined. Other elements may optionally be present other than the elements specifically identified by the “and/or” clause, whether related or unrelated to those elements specifically identified. Thus, as a non-limiting example, a reference to “A and/or B”, when used in conjunction with open-ended language such as “comprising” can refer, in one embodiment, to A only (optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to B only (optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to both A and B (optionally including other elements); etc.

As used herein in the specification and in the claims, “or” should be understood to have the same meaning as “and/or” as defined above. For example, when separating items in a list, “or” or “and/or” shall be interpreted as being inclusive, i.e., the inclusion of at least one, but also including more than one, of a number or list of elements, and, optionally, additional unlisted items. Only terms clearly indicated to the contrary, such as “only one of” or “exactly one of,” or, when used in the claims, “consisting of,” will refer to the inclusion of exactly one element of a number or list of elements. In general, the term “or” as used herein shall only be interpreted as indicating exclusive alternatives (i.e., “one or the other but not both”) when preceded by terms of exclusivity, such as “either,” “one of,” “only one of,” or “exactly one of.”

In the claims, as well as in the specification above, all transitional phrases such as “comprising,” “including,” “carrying,” “having,” “containing,” “involving,” “holding,” “composed of,” and the like are to be understood to be open-ended, i.e., to mean including but not limited to. Only the transitional phrases “consisting of” and “consisting essentially of” shall be closed or semi-closed transitional phrases, respectively, as set forth in the United States Patent Office Manual of Patent Examining Procedures, Section 2111.03.

As used herein in the specification and in the claims, the phrase “at least one,” in reference to a list of one or more elements, should be understood to mean at least one element selected from anyone or more of the elements in the list of elements, but not necessarily including at least one of each and every element specifically listed within the list of elements and not excluding any combinations of elements in the list of elements. This definition also allows that elements may optionally be present other than the elements specifically identified within the list of elements to which the phrase “at least one” refers, whether related or unrelated to those elements specifically identified. Thus, as a nonlimiting example, “at least one of A and B” (or, equivalently, “at least one of A or B,” or, equivalently “at least one of A and/or B”) can refer, in one embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, with no B present (and optionally including elements other than B); in another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, B, with no A present (and optionally including elements other than A); in yet another embodiment, to at least one, optionally including more than one, A, and at least one, optionally including more than one, B (and optionally including other elements); etc.

It should also be understood that, in certain methods described herein that include more than one step or act, the order of the steps or acts of the method is not necessarily limited to the order in which the steps or acts of the method are recited unless the context indicates otherwise.

The terms “co-administration” and “co-administering” or “combination therapy” refer to both concurrent administration (administration of two or more therapeutic agents at the same time) and time varied administration (administration of one or more therapeutic agents at a time different from that of the administration of an additional therapeutic agent or agents), as long as the therapeutic agents are present in the patient to some extent, preferably at effective amounts, at the same time. In certain preferred aspects, one or more of the present compounds described herein, are coadministered in combination with at least one additional bioactive agent, especially including an anticancer agent, such as a chemotherapy or biological therapy that targets epidermal growth factor receptors (e.g., epidermal growth factor receptor inhibitors, such as at least one of gefitinib, erlotinib, neratinib, lapatinib, cetuximab, vandetanib, necitumamab, osimertinib, or a combination thereof). In particularly preferred aspects, the co-administration of compounds results in synergistic activity and/or therapy, including anticancer activity.

The term “compound”, as used herein, unless otherwise indicated, refers to any specific chemical compound disclosed herein and includes tautomers, regioisomers, geometric isomers, and where applicable, stereoisomers, including optical isomers (enantiomers) and other stereoisomers (diastereomers) thereof, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and derivatives, including prodrug and/or deuterated forms thereof where applicable, in context. Deuterated small molecules contemplated are those in which one or more of the hydrogen atoms contained in the drug molecule have been replaced by deuterium.

Within its use in context, the term compound generally refers to a single compound, but also may include other compounds such as stereoisomers, regioisomers and/or optical isomers (including racemic mixtures) as well as specific enantiomers or enantiomerically enriched mixtures of disclosed compounds. The term also refers, in context to prodrug forms of compounds which have been modified to facilitate the administration and delivery of compounds to a site of activity. It is noted that in describing the present compounds, numerous substituents and variables associated with same, among others, are described. It is understood by those of ordinary skill that molecules which are described herein are stable compounds as generally described hereunder. When the bond is shown, both a double bond and single bond are represented or understood within the context of the compound shown and well-known rules for valence interactions.

The term “ubiquitin ligase” refers to a family of proteins that facilitate the transfer of ubiquitin to a specific substrate protein, targeting the substrate protein for degradation. For example, TAP an E3 ubiquitin ligase protein that alone or in combination with an E2 ubiquitin-conjugating enzyme causes the attachment of ubiquitin to a lysine on a target protein, and subsequently targets the specific protein substrates for degradation by the proteasome. Thus, E3 ubiquitin ligase alone or in complex with an E2 ubiquitin conjugating enzyme is responsible for the transfer of ubiquitin to targeted proteins. In general, the ubiquitin ligase is involved in polyubiquitination such that a second ubiquitin is attached to the first; a third is attached to the second, and so forth. Polyubiquitination marks proteins for degradation by the proteasome. However, there are some ubiquitination events that are limited to mono-ubiquitination, in which only a single ubiquitin is added by the ubiquitin ligase to a substrate molecule. Mono-ubiquitinated proteins are not targeted to the proteasome for degradation, but may instead be altered in their cellular location or function, for example, via binding other proteins that have domains capable of binding ubiquitin. Further complicating matters, different lysines on ubiquitin can be targeted by an E3 to make chains. The most common lysine is Lys48 on the ubiquitin chain. This is the lysine used to make polyubiquitin, which is recognized by the proteasome.

The term “patient” or “subject” is used throughout the specification to describe an animal, preferably a human or a domesticated animal, to whom treatment, including prophylactic treatment, with the compositions according to the present disclosure is provided. For treatment of those infections, conditions or disease states which are specific for a specific animal such as a human patient, the term patient refers to that specific animal, including a domesticated animal such as a dog or cat or a farm animal such as a horse, cow, sheep, etc. In general, in the present disclosure, the term patient refers to a human patient unless otherwise stated or implied from the context of the use of the term.

The term “effective” is used to describe an amount of a compound, composition or component which, when used within the context of its intended use, effects an intended result. The term effective subsumes all other effective amount or effective concentration terms, which are otherwise described or used in the present application.

Compounds and Compositions

In one aspect, the description provides compounds comprising an E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (“ULM”) that is an IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (an “ILM”), a cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (a “CLM”), a Von Hippel-Lindae E3 ubiquitin ligase (VHL) binding moiety (VLM), and/or a mouse double minute 2 homologue (MDM2) E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety (MLM). In an exemplary embodiment, the ULM is coupled to a target protein binding moiety (PTM) via a chemical linker (L) according to the structure:

wherein L is a bond or a chemical linker group, ULM is a E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety, and PTM is a target protein binding moiety. The number and/or relative positions of the moieties in the compounds illustrated herein is provided by way of example only. As would be understood by the skilled artisan, compounds described herein can be synthesized with any desired number and/or relative position of the respective functional moieties.

The terms ULM, ILM, VLM, MLM, and CLM are used in their inclusive sense unless the context indicates otherwise. For example, the term ULM is inclusive of all ULMs, including those that bind IAP (i.e., ILMs), MDM2 (i.e., MLM), cereblon (i.e., CLM), and VHL (i.e., VLM). Further, the term ILM is inclusive of all possible IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moieties, the term MLM is inclusive of all possible MDM2 E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moieties, the term VLM is inclusive of all possible VHL binding moieties, and the term CLM is inclusive of all cereblon binding moieties.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides bifunctional or multifunctional compounds (e.g., PROTACs) useful for regulating protein activity by inducing the degradation of a target protein. In certain embodiments, the compound comprises an ILM or a VLM or a CLM or a MLM coupled, e.g., linked covalently, directly or indirectly, to a moiety that binds a target protein (i.e., a protein targeting moiety or a “PTM”). In certain embodiments, the ILM/VLM/CLM/MLM and PTM are joined or coupled via a chemical linker (L). The ILM binds the IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase, the VLM binds VHL, CLM binds the cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase, and MLM binds the MDM2 E3 ubiquitin ligase, and the PTM recognizes a target protein and the interaction of the respective moieties with their targets facilitates the degradation of the target protein by placing the target protein in proximity to the ubiquitin ligase protein. An exemplary bifunctional compound can be depicted as:

In certain embodiments, the bifunctional compound further comprises a chemical linker (“L”). For example, the bifunctional compound can be depicted as:

wherein the PTM is a protein/polypeptide targeting moiety, the L is a chemical linker, the ILM is a IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety, the CLM is a cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety, the VLM is a VHL binding moiety, and the MLM is a MDM2 E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety.

In certain embodiments, the ULM (e.g., a ILM, a CLM, a VLM, or a MLM) shows activity or binds to the E3 ubiquitin ligase (e.g., IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase, cereblon E3 ubiquitin ligase, VHL, or MDM2 E3 ubiquitin ligase) with an IC 50 of less than about 200 μM. The IC 50 can be determined according to any method known in the art, e.g., a fluorescent polarization assay.

In certain additional embodiments, the bifunctional compounds described herein demonstrate an activity with an IC 50 of less than about 100, 50, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, 0.005, 0.001 mM, or less than about 100, 50, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, 0.005, 0.001 μM, or less than about 100, 50, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, 0.005, 0.001 nM, or less than about 100, 50, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01, 0.005, 0.001 pM.

In certain embodiments, the compounds as described herein comprise multiple PTMs (targeting the same or different protein targets), multiple ULMs, one or more ULMs (i.e., moieties that bind specifically to multiple/different E3 ubiquitin ligase, e.g., VHL, IAP, cereblon, and/or MDM2) or a combination thereof. In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the PTMs and ULMs (e.g., ILM, VLM, CLM, and/or MLM) can be coupled directly or via one or more chemical linkers or a combination thereof. In additional embodiments, where a compound has multiple ULMs, the ULMs can be for the same E3 ubiquintin ligase or each respective ULM can bind specifically to a different E3 ubiquitin ligase. In still further embodiments, where a compound has multiple PTMs, the PTMs can bind the same target protein or each respective PTM can bind specifically to a different target protein.

In certain embodiments, where the compound comprises multiple ULMs, the ULMs are identical. In additional embodiments, the compound comprising a plurality of ULMs (e.g., ULM, ULM′, etc.), at least one PTM coupled to a ULM directly or via a chemical linker (L) or both. In certain additional embodiments, the compound comprising a plurality of ULMs further comprises multiple PTMs. In still additional embodiments, the PTMs are the same or, optionally, different. In still further embodiments, wherein the PTMs are different, the respective PTMs may bind the same protein target or bind specifically to a different protein target.

In certain embodiments, the compound may comprise a plurality of ULMs and/or a plurality of ULM's. In further embodiments, the compound comprising at least two different ULMs, a plurality of ULMs, and/or a plurality of ULM's further comprises at least one PTM coupled to a ULM or a ULM′ directly or via a chemical linker or both. In any of the embodiments described herein, a compound comprising at least two different ULMs can further comprise multiple PTMs. In still additional embodiments, the PTMs are the same or, optionally, different. In still further embodiments, wherein the PTMs are different the respective PTMs may bind the same protein target or bind specifically to a different protein target. In still further embodiments, the PTM itself is a ULM (or ULM′), such as an ILM, a VLM, a CLM, a MLM, an ILM′, a VLM′, a CLM′, and/or a MLM′.

In additional embodiments, the description provides the compounds as described herein including their enantiomers, diastereomers, solvates and polymorphs, including pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms thereof, e.g., acid and base salt forms.

Exemplary ILMs

AVPI Tetrapeptide Fragments

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can comprise an alanine-valine-proline-isoleucine (AVPI) tetrapeptide fragment or an unnatural mimetic thereof. In certain embodiments, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of chemical structures represented by Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V):

wherein:

R 1 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) is selected from H or alkyl; R 2 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) is selected from H or alkyl; R 3 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) is selected from H, alkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; R 5 and R 6 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) are independently selected from H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, or more preferably, R 5 and R 6 taken together for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) form a pyrrolidine or a piperidine ring further optionally fused to 1-2 cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl rings, each of which can then be further fused to another cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring; R 3 and R 5 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) taken together can form a 5-8-membered ring further optionally fused to 1-2 cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl rings; R 7 for Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV), and (V) is selected from cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, aryl, aryl-C(O)—R 4 , arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryl-C(O)—R 4 , heteroaryl-R 4 , heteroaryl-naphthalene, heteroarylalkyl, or —C(O)NH—R 4 , each one further optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents selected from halogen, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxy, cyano, (hetero)cycloalkyl, aryl, (hetero)aryl, —C(O)NH—R 4 , or C(O)—R 4 ; and R 4 is selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, heterocycloalkylalkyl, aryl (e.g., bicyclic aryl), arylalkyl, heteroaryl (e.g., a bicyclic heteroaryl), heteroarylalkyl, further optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents as described above.

As shown above, P1, P2, P3, and P4 of Formula (II) correlate with A, V, P, and I, respectively, of the AVPI tetrapeptide fragment or an unnatural mimetic thereof. Similarly, each of Formulas (I) and (III) through (V) have portions correlating with A, V, P, and I of the AVPI tetrapeptide fragment or an unnatural mimetic thereof.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (VI), which is a derivative of IAP antagonists described in WO Pub. No. 2008/014236, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from H, C 1 -C 4 -alky, C 1 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 1 -C 4 -alkynyl or C 3 -C 10 -cycloalkyl which are unsubstituted or substituted; R 2 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from H, C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 1 -C 4 -alkynyl or C 3 -C 10 -cycloalkyl which are unsubstituted or substituted; R 3 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from H, —CF 3 , —C 2 H 5 , C 1 -C 4 -alkyl, C 1 -C 4 -alkenyl, C 1 -C 4 -alkynyl, —CH 2 —Z or any R 2 and R 3 together form a heterocyclic ring; each Z of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from H, —OH, F, Cl, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , —CH 2 Cl, —CH 2 F or —CH 2 OH; R 4 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from C 1 -C 16 straight or branched alkyl, C 1 -C 16 -alkenyl, C 1 -C 16 -alkynyl, C 3 -C 10 -cycloalkyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —Z 1 , —(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, and —(CH 2 ) 0-6 -het, wherein alkyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl are unsubstituted or substituted; R 5 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from H, C 1 -C 10 -alkyl, aryl, phenyl, C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 10 -alkyl-aryl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl-(CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-4 —CH[(CH 2 ) 1-4 -phenyl] 2 , indanyl, —C(O)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C(O)-phenyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 -het, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, or R 5 is selected from a residue of an amino acid, wherein the alkyl, cycloalkyl, phenyl, and aryl substituents are unsubstituted or substituted; Z 1 of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from —N(R 10 )—C(O)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —N(R 10 )—C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —N(R 10 )—C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, —N(R 10 )—C(O)(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —C(O)—N(R 11 )(R 12 ), —C(O)—O—C 1-10 -alkyl, —C(O)—O—(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —C(O)—O—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, —C(O)—O—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —O—C(O)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —O—C(O)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —O—C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, —O—C(O)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, wherein alkyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl are unsubstituted or substituted; het of Formula (VI) is, independently selected from a 5-7 member heterocyclic ring containing 1-4 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, or an 8-12 member fused ring system including at least one 5-7 member heterocyclic ring containing 1, 2, or 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S, which heterocyclic ring or fused ring system is unsubstituted or substituted on a carbon or nitrogen atom; R 10 of Formula (VI) is selected from H, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , —CH 2 OH, or —CH 2 Cl; R 11 and R 12 of Formula (VI) are independently selected from H, C 1-4 -alkyl, C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloakyl, (CH 2 ) 0-6 -phenyl, wherein alkyl, cycloalkyl, and phenyl are unsubstituted or substituted; or R 11 and R 12 together with the nitrogen form het, and U of Formula (VI) is, independently, as shown in Formula (VII):

wherein:

each a of Formula (VII) is, independently selected from 0 to 5; X of Formula (VII) is selected from the group —CH and N; R a and R b , of Formula (VII) are independently selected from the group O, S, or N atom or C 0-8 -alkyl wherein one or more of the carbon atoms in the alkyl chain are optionally replaced by a heteroatom selected from O, S, or N, and where each alkyl is, independently, either unsubstituted or substituted; R d of Formula (VII) is selected from the group Re-Q-(R f ) p (R g ) q , and Ar 1 -D-Ar 2 ; R c of Formula (VII) is selected from the group H or any R c and R d together form a cycloalkyl or het; where if R c and R d form a cycloalkyl or het, R 5 is attached to the formed ring at a C or N atom; p and q of Formula (VII) are independently selected from 0 or 1; R e of Formula (VII) is selected from the group C 1-8 -alkyl and alkylidene, and each Re is either unsubstituted or substituted; Q is selected from the group N, O, S, S(O), and S(O) 2 ; Ar 1 and Ar 2 of Formula (VII) are independently selected from the group of substituted or unsubstituted aryl and het; R f and R g of Formula (VII) are independently selected from H, —C1-10-alkyl, C 1-10 -alkylaryl, —OH, —O—C 1-10 -alkyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalky, —O—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, phenyl, aryl, phenyl-phenyl, —(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —O—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —OR 13 , —C(O)—R 13 , —C(O)—N(R 13 )(R 14 ), —N(R 13 )(R 14 ), —S—R 13 , —S(O)—R 13 , —S(O) 2 —R 13 , —S(O) 2 —NR 13 R 14 , —NR 13 —S(O) 2 —R 14 , —S—C 1-10 -alkyl, aryl-C 1-4 -alkyl, or het-C 1-4 -alkyl, wherein alkyl, cycloalkyl, het, and aryl are unsubstituted or substituted, —SO 2 —C 1-2 -alkyl, —SO 2 —C 1-2 -alkylphenyl, —O—C 1-4 -alkyl, or any R g and R f together form a ring selected from het or aryl; D of Formula (VII) is selected from the group —CO—, —C(O)—C 1-7 -alkylene or arylene, —CF 2 —, —O—, —S(O) r where r is 0-2, 1,3-dioxalane, or C 1-7 -alkyl-OH; where alkyl, alkylene, or arylene are unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halogens, OH, —O—C 1-6 -alkyl, —S—C 1-6 -alkyl, or —CF 3 ; or each D is, independently selected from N(R h ); Rh is selected from the group H, unsubstituted or substituted C 1-7 -alkyl, aryl, unsubstituted or substituted —O—(C 1-7 -cycloalkyl), —C(O)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —C(O)—C 0-10 -alkyl-aryl, —C—O—C 01-10 -alkyl, —C—O—C 0-10 -alkyl-aryl, —SO 2 —C 1-10 -alkyl, or —SO 2 —(C 0-10 -alkylaryl); R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9 of Formula (VII) are, independently, selected from the group H, —C 1-10 -alkyl, —C 1-10 -alkoxy, aryl-C 1-10 -alkoxy, —OH, —O—C 1-10 -alkyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —O—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, phenyl, —(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —O—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, —OR 13 , —C(O)—R 13 , —C(O)—N(R 13 )(R 14 ), —N(R 13 )(R 14 ), —S—R 13 , —S(O)—R 13 , —S(O) 2 —R 13 , —S(O) 2 —NR 13 R 14 , or —NR 13 —S(O) 2 —R 14 ; wherein each alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl is unsubstituted or substituted; and any R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , and R 9 optionally together form a ring system; R 13 and R 14 of Formula (VII) are independently selected from the group H, C 1-10 -alkyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —(CH 2 ) 0-6 —(CH) 0-1 -(aryl) 1-2 , —C(O)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —C(O)—O—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 —O-fluorenyl, —C(O)—NH—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, —C(O)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -het, —C(S)—C 1-10 -alkyl, —C(S)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 —C 3-7 -cycloalkyl, —C(S)—O—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, —C(S)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 —O-fluorenyl, —C(S)—NH—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, —C(S)—(CH 2 ) 0-6 -aryl, or —C(S)—(CH 2 ) 1-6 -het, wherein each alkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl is unsubstituted or substituted: or any R 13 and R 14 together with a nitrogen atom form het; wherein alkyl substituents of R 13 and R 14 of Formula (VII) are unsubstituted or substituted and when substituted, are substituted by one or more substituents selected from C 1-10 -alkyl, halogen, OH, —O—C 1-6 -alkyl, —S—C 1-6 -alkyl, and —CF 3 ; and substituted phenyl or aryl of R 13 and R 14 are substituted by one or more substituents selected from halogen, hydroxyl, C 1-4 -alkyl, C 1-4 -alkoxy, nitro, —CN, —O—C(O)—C 1-4 -alkyl, and —C(O)—O—C 1-4 -aryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or hydrate thereof.

In certain embodiments, the compound further comprises an independently selected second ILM attached to the ILM of Formula (VI), or an unnatural mimetic thereof, by way of at least one additional independently selected linker group. In an embodiment, the second ILM is a derivative of Formula (VI), or an unnatural mimetic thereof. In a certain embodiment, the at least one additional independently selected linker group comprises two additional independently selected linker groups chemically linking the ILM and the second ILM. In an embodiment, the at least one additional linker group for an ILM of the Formula (VI), or an unnatural mimetic thereof, chemically links groups selected from R 4 and R 5 . For example, an ILM of Formula (VI) and a second ILM of Formula (VI), or an unnatural mimetic thereof, can be linked as shown below:

In certain embodiments, the ILM, the at least one additional independently selected linker group L, and the second ILM has a structure selected from the group consisting of:

which are derivatives of IAP antagonists described in WO Pub. No. 2008/014236.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (VIII), which is based on the IAP ligrands described in Ndubaku, C., et al. Antagonism of c-IAP and XIAP proteins is required for efficient induction of cell death by small-molecule IAP antagonists, ACS Chem. Biol., 557-566, 4 (7) (2009), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein each of A1 and A2 of Formula (VIII) is independently selected from optionally substituted monocyclic, fused rings, aryls and hetoroaryls; and

R of Formula (VIII) is selected from H or Me.

In a particular embodiment, the linker group L is attached to A1 of Formula (VIII). In another embodiment, the linker group L is attached to A2 of Formula (VIII).

In a particular embodiment, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (IX), which is derived from the chemotypes cross-referenced in Mannhold, R., et al. IAP antagonists: promising candidates for cancer therapy, Drug Discov. Today, 15 (5-6), 210-9 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein R 1 is selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl and, most preferably, from isopropyl, tert-butyl, cyclohexyl and tetrahydropyranyl, and R 2 of Formula (IX) is selected from —OPh or H.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (X), which is derived from the chemotypes cross-referenced in Mannhold, R., et al. IAP antagonists: promising candidates for cancer therapy, Drug Discov. Today, 15 (5-6), 210-9 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (X) is selected from H, —CH 2 OH, —CH 2 CH 2 OH, —CH 2 NH 2 , —CH 2 CH 2 NH 2 ;

X of Formula (X) is selected from S or CH 2 ;

R 2 of Formula (X) is selected from:

R 3 and R 4 of Formula (X) are independently selected from H or Me

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XI), which is derived from the chemotypes cross-referenced in Mannhold, R., et al. IAP antagonists: promising candidates for cancer therapy, Drug Discov. Today, 15 (5-6), 210-9 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein R 1 of Formula (XI) is selected from H or Me, and R 2 of Formula (XI) is selected from H or

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XII), which is derived from the chemotypes cross-referenced in Mannhold, R., et al. IAP antagonists: promising candidates for cancer therapy, Drug Discov. Today, 15 (5-6), 210-9 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (XII) is selected from:

and

R 2 of Formula (XII) is selected from:

In any of the compounds described herein, the IAP E3 ubiquitin ligase binding moiety is selected from the group consisting of:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XIII), which is based on the IAP ligands summarized in Flygare, J. A., et al. Small-molecule pan-IAP antagonists: a patent review, Expert Opin. Ther. Pat., 20 (2), 251-67 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

Z of Formula (XIII) is absent or O; R 1 of Formula (XIII) is selected from:

R 10 of

is selected from H, alkyl, or aryl;

X is selected from CH2 and O; and

is a nitrogen-containing heteroaryl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XIV), which is based on the IAP ligands summarized in Flygare, J. A., et al. Small-molecule pan-IAP antagonists: a patent review, Expert Opin. Ther. Pat., 20 (2), 251-67 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

Z of Formula (XIV) is absent or O; R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XIV) are independently selected from H or Me; R 1 of Formula (XIV) is selected from:

R 10 of

is selected from H, alkyl, or aryl;

X of

is selected from CH 2 and O; and

is a nitrogen-containing heteraryl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of:

which are derivatives of ligands disclose in US Patent Pub. No. 2008/0269140 and U.S. Pat. No. 7,244,851.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XV), which was a derivative of the IAP ligand described in WO Pub. No. 2008/128171, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

Z of Formula (XV) is absent or O; R 1 of Formula (XV) is selected from:

R 10 of

is selected from H, alkyl, or aryl;

X of

is selected from CH 2 and O; and

is a nitrogen-containing heteraryl; and

R 2 of Formula (XV) selected from H, alkyl, or acyl;

In a particular embodiment, the ILM has the following structure:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XVI), which is based on the IAP ligand described in WO Pub. No. 2006/069063, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 2 of Formula (XVI) is selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl; more preferably, from isopropyl, tert-butyl, cyclohexyl and tetrahydropyranyl, most preferably from cyclohexyl;

of Formula (XVI) is a 5- or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heteroaryl; more preferably, 5-membered nitrogen-containing heteroaryl, and most preferably thiazole; and Ar of Formula (XVI) is an aryl or a heteroaryl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XVII), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Cohen, F. et al., Antogonists of inhibitors of apoptosis proteins based on thiazole amide isosteres, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 20(7), 2229-33 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (XVII) is selected from to group halogen (e.g. fluorine), cyano,

X of Formula (XVII) is selected from the group O or CH 2 .

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XVIII), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Cohen, F. et al., Antogonists of inhibitors of apoptosis proteins based on thiazole amide isosteres, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 20(7), 2229-33 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein R of Formula (XVIII) is selected from alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl or halogen (in variable substitution position).

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XIX), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Cohen, F. et al., Antogonists of inhibitors of apoptosis proteins based on thiazole amide isosteres , Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 20(7), 2229-33 (2010), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein

is a 6-member nitrogen heteroaryl.

In a certain embodiment, the ILM of the composition is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, the ILM of the composition is selected from the group consisting of:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XX), which is based on the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2007/101347, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein X of Formula (XX) is selected from CH 2 , O, NH, or S.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXI), which is based on the IAP ligands described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,345,081 and 7,419,975, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 2 of Formula (XXI) is selected from:

R 5 of Formula (XXI) is selected from:

and

W of Formula (XXI) is selected from CH or N; and R 6 of

are independently a mono- or bicyclic fused aryl or heteroaryl.

In certain embodiments, the ILM of the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, the ILM of the compound is selected from the group consisting of:

which are described in WO Pub. No. 2009/060292, U.S. Pat. No. 7,517,906, WO Pub. No. 2008/134679, WO Pub. No. 2007/130626, and WO Pub. No. 2008/128121.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2015/006524 and Perez H L, Discovery of potent heterodimeric antagonists of inhibitor of apoptosis proteins ( IAPs ) with sustained antitumor activity . J. Med. Chem. 58(3), 1556-62 (2015), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII) is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; R 2 of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII) is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; or alternatively, R 1 and R 2 of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII) are independently optionally substituted thioalkyl wherein the substituents attached to the S atom of the thioalkyl are optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 , —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 or —CH 2 R 23 ; wherein: v is an integer from 1-3; R 20 and R 22 of —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 and —CH 2 R 23 are independently selected from OH, NR 24 R 25 or OR 26 ; R 21 of —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 2 is selected from the group NR 24 R 25 ; R 23 of —CH 2 R 23 is selected from optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heterocyclyl, where the optional substituents include alkyl and halogen; R 24 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 25 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 O) m CH 3 , or a polyamine chain, such as spermine or spermidine; R 26 of OR 26 is selected from optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the optional substituents are OH, halogen or NH 2 ; and m is an integer from 1-8; R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII) are independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted arylalkoxy, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, wherein the substituents are alkyl, halogen or OH; R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 of Formula (XXII) or (XXIII) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and X is selected from a bond or a chemical linker group, and/or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof.

In certain embodiments, X is a bond or is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein “*” is the point of attachment of a PTM, L or ULM, e.g., an ILM.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXIV) or (XXVI), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2015/006524 and Perez H L, Discovery of potent heterodimeric antagonists of inhibitor of apoptosis proteins ( IAPs ) with sustained antitumor activity . J. Med. Chem. 58(3), 1556-62 (2015), or an unnatural mimetic thereof, and the chemical linker to linker group L as shown:

wherein:

R 1 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) is selected from optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; R 2 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) is selected from optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; or alternatively, R 1 and R 2 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) are independently selected from optionally substituted thioalkyl wherein the substituents attached to the S atom of the thioalkyl are optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 , —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 or —CH 2 R 23 , wherein:

v is an integer from 1-3; R 20 and R 22 of —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 and —CH 2 R 23 are independently selected from OH, NR 24 R 25 or OR 26 ; R 21 of —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 2 is selected from NR 24 R 25 ; R 23 of —CH 2 R 23 is selected from optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heterocyclyl, wherein the optional substituents include alkyl and halogen; R 24 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 25 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 O) m CH 3 , or a polyamine chain, such as spermine or spermidine; R 26 of OR 26 is selected from optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the optional substituents are OH, halogen or NH 2 ; and m is an integer from 1-8; R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) are independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted arylalkoxy, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, wherein the substituents are alkyl, halogen or OH; R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) are independently hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and/or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof.

In a particular embodiment, the ILM according to Formulas (XXII) through (XXVI):

R 7 and R 8 are selected from the H or Me; R 5 and R 6 are selected from the group comprising:

R 3 and R 4 are selected from the group comprising:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXVII) or (XXVII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/055461 and Kim, K S, Discovery of tetrahydroisoquinoline - based bivalent heterodimeric IAP antagonists . Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 24(21), 5022-9 (2014), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 35 is 1-2 substituents selected from alkyl, halogen, alkoxy, cyano and haloalkoxy; R 1 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) is selected from H or an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; R 2 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) is selected from H or an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; or alternatively, R 1 and R 2 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) are independently selected from an optionally substituted thioalkyl —CR 60 R 61 SR 70 , wherein R 60 and R 61 are selected from H or methyl, and R 70 is selected from an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 , —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 or —CH 2 R 23 , wherein:

v is an integer from 1-3; R 20 and R 22 of —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 and —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 are independently selected from OH, NR 24 R 25 or OR 26 ; R 21 of —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 is selected from NR 24 R 25 ; R 23 of —CH 2 R 23 is selected from an optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heterocyclyl, where the optional substituents include alkyl and halogen; R 24 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 25 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —CH 2 CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 ) m CH 3 , or a polyamine chain —[CH 2 CH 2 (CH 2 ) δ NH] ψ CH 2 CH 2 (CH 2 ) ω NH 2 , such as spermine or spermidine; wherein δ=0-2, ψ=1-3, ω =0-2; R 26 of OR 26 is an optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the optional substituents are OH, halogen or NH 2 ; and m is an integer from 1-8, R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) are independently selected from an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted arylalkoxy, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, wherein the substituents are alkyl, halogen or OH; R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 31 of Formulas (XXVII) and (XXVIII) is selected from alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl optionally further substituted, preferably selected form the group consisting of:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXIX), (XXX), (XXXI), or (XXXII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/055461 and Kim, K S, Discovery of tetrahydroisoquinoline - based bivalent heterodimeric IAP antagonists . Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 24(21), 5022-9 (2014), or an unnatural mimetic thereof, and the chemical linker to linker group L as shown:

wherein:

R 2 of Formula (XXIX) through (XXXII) is selected from H, an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; or alternatively; R 1 and R 2 of Formula (XXVII) and (XXVIII) are independently selected from H, an optionally substituted thioalkyl —CR 60 R 61 SR 70 wherein R 60 and R 61 are selected from H or methyl, and R 70 is an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 , —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 or —CH 2 R 23 ; wherein: v is an integer from 1-3; R 20 and R 22 of —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 and —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 are independently selected from OH, NR 24 R 25 or OR 26 ; R 21 of —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 is selected from NR 24 R 25 ; R 23 of —CH 2 R 23 is selected from an optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heterocyclyl, where the optional substituents include alkyl and halogen; R 24 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 25 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —CH 2 CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 2 ) m CH 3 , or a polyamine chain —[CH 2 CH 2 (CH 2 ) δ NH] ψ CH 2 CH 2 (CH 2 ) ω r NH 2 , such as spermine or spermidine, wherein δ=0-2, ψ=1-3, ω =0-2; R 26 of OR 26 is an optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the optional substituents are OH, halogen or NH 2 ; m is an integer from 1-8; R 6 and R 8 of Formula (XXIX) through (XXXII) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; and R 31 of Formulas (XXIX) through (XXXII) is selected from alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl optionally further substituted, preferably selected form the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, the ILM of the compound is:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXXIII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/074658 and WO Pub. No. 2013/071035, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 2 of Formula (XXXIII) is selected from H, an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl; R 6 and R 8 of Formula (XXXIII) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 32 of Formula (XXXIII) is selected from (C1-C4 alkylene)-R 33 wherein R 33 is selected from hydrogen, aryl, heteroaryl or cycloalkyl optionally further substituted; X of Formula (XXXIII) is selected from:

Z and Z′ of Formula (XXXIII) are independently selected from:

wherein each

represents a point of attachment to the compound, and Z and Z′ cannot both be

in any given compound;

Y of Formula (XXXIII) is selected from:

wherein Z and Z′ of Formula (XXXIII) are the same and Z is

wherein each

represents a point of attachment to the compound, X is selected from:

and

Y of Formula (XXXIII) is independently selected from:

wherein:

represents a point of attachment to a —C═O portion of the compound;

represents a point of attachment to a —NH portion of the compound;

represents a first point of attachment to Z;

represents a second point of attachment to Z;

m is an integer from 0-3;

n is an integer from 1-3;

p is an integer from 0-4; and

A is —C(O)R 3 ;

R 3 is selected from —C(O)R 3 is OH, NHCN, NHSO 2 R 10 , NHOR 11 or N(R 12 )(R 13 );

R 10 and F 11 of NHSO 2 R 10 and NHOR 11 are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or heterocycloalkyl;

R 12 and R 13 of N(R 12 )(R 13 ) are independently selected from hydrogen, —C 1 -C 4 alkyl, —(C 1 -C 4 ) alkylene)-NH—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —(C 1 -C 4 alkylene)-O—(C 1 -C 4 hydroxyalkyl), or R 12 and R 13 taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are commonly bound to form a saturated heterocyclyl optionally comprising one additional heteroatom selected from N, O and S, and wherein the saturated heterocycle is optionally substituted with methyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXXIV) or (XXXV), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/047024, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

v is an integer from 1-3; R 20 and R 22 of —(CH 2 ) v COR 20 and —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 are independently selected from OH, NR 24 R 25 or OR 26 ; R 21 of —CH 2 CHR 21 COR 22 is selected from NR 24 R 25 ; R 23 of —CH 2 R 23 are selected from an optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted heterocyclyl, where the optional substituents include alkyl and halogen; R 24 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 25 of NR 24 R 25 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted branched alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, —CH 2 (OCH 2 CH 20 )mCH3, or a polyamine chain; R 26 is an optionally substituted alkyl, wherein the optional substituents are OH, halogen or NH 2 ; m of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — is an integer from 1-8;

R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XXXIV) or (XXXV) are independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted arylalkoxy, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl, wherein the substituents are alkyl, halogen or OH;

R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 of Formula (XXXIV) or (XXXV) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl;

R 10 and R 11 of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen or optionally substituted alkyl;

R 12 and R 13 of

are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen or optionally substituted alkyl, or R 12 and R 13 can be taken together to form a carbocyclic ring;

R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 and R 18 of

are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl or OR 19 ;

R 19 of OR 19 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; m and n of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; o and p of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — are independently 0, 1, 2 or 3; q of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; r is 0 or 1; t of —(CR 10 R 11 ) m — is 1, 2, or 3; and/or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXXVI), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/025759, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

where:

A of Formula (XXXVI) is selected from:

where the dotted line represents an optional double bond;

X of Formula (XXXVI) is selected from: —(CR 21 R 22 ) m —,

Y and Z of Formula (XXXVI) are independently selected from —O—, —NR 6 — or are absent;

V of Formula (XXXVI) is selected from —N— or —CH—;

W of Formula (XXXVI) is selected from —CH— or —N—;

R 1 of Formula (XXXVI) is selected from an optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkylalkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or optionally substituted aryl;

R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XXXVI) are independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, optionally substituted heteroarylalkyl or optionally substituted heterocycloalkyl;

R 5 , R 6 , R 7 and R 8 of Formula (XXIV), (XXV) or (XXVI) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or preferably methyl;

R 9 and R 10 of

are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen or optionally substituted alkyl, or R 9 and R 10 can be taken together to form a ring;

R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 of

are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl or OR 15 ;

R 15 of OR 15 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; m and n of —(CR 21 R 22 ) m — and

are independently selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;

o and p of

and are independently selected from 0, 1, 2 or 3;

q of

is selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4;

r of

is selected from 0 or 1, and/or or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXXVII) or (XXXVIII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2014/011712, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

X of Formulas (XXXVII) and (XXXVIII) is —(CR 16 R 17 ) m —,

are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl, or R 9 and R 10 may be taken together to form a ring;

R 11 to R 14 of

are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, optionally substituted alkyl or OR 15 ;

R 15 of OR 15 is selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl; R 16 and R 17 of —(CR 16 R 17 ) m — are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen or optionally substituted alkyl; R 50 and R 51 of Formula (XXXVII) and (XXXVIII) are independently selected from optionally substituted alkyl, or R 50 and R 51 are taken together to form a ring; m and n of —(CR 16 R 17 ) m — and

are independently an integer from 0-4;

and p of

are independently an integer from 0-3;

q of

is an integer from 0-4; and

r of

is an integer from 0-1;

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof.

In an embodiment, R 1 and R 2 of the ILM of Formula (XXXVII) or (XXXVIII) are t-butyl and R 3 and R 4 of the ILM of Formula (XXXVII) or (XXXVIII) are tetrahydronaphtalene.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XXXIX) or (XL), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2013/071039, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 43 and R 44 of Formulas (XXXIX) and (XL) are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl further optionally substituted, and R 6 and R 8 of Formula (XXXIX) and (XL) are independently selected from hydrogen, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted cycloalkyl. each X of Formulas (XXXIX) and (XL) is independently selected from:

each Z of Formulas (XXXIX) and (XL) is selected from

wherein each

represents a point of attachment to the compound; and

each Y is selected from:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XLI), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2013/071039, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

W 1 of Formula (XLI) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8a )(R 8b ); W 2 of Formula (XLI) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8c )(R 8d ); provided that W 1 and W 2 are not both O, or both S; R 1 of Formula (XLI) is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); when X 1 is selected from O, N—R A , S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , then X 2 is C(R 2a R 2b ); or: X 1 of Formula (XLI) is selected from CR 2c R 2d and X 2 is CR 2a R 2b , and R 2c and R 2a together form a bond; or: X 1 and X 2 of Formula (XLI) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring; or: X 1 of Formula (XLI) is selected from CH 2 and X 2 is C═O, C═C(R C ) 2 , or C═NR C ; where each R c is independently selected from H, —CN, —OH, alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); R A of N—R A is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, —C(═O)C 1 -C 2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , R 2d of CR 2c R 2d and CR 2a R 2b are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C6alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl) and —C(═O)R B ; R B of —C(═O)R B is selected from substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or —NR D R E ; R D and R E of NR D R E are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); m of Formula (XLI) is selected from 0, 1 or 2; —U— of Formula (XLI) is selected from —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—, —NHS(═O) 2 —, —S(═O) 2 NH—, —NHC(═O)NH—, —NH(C═O)O—, —O(C═O)NH—, or —NHS(═O) 2 NH—; R 3 of Formula (XLI) is selected from C 1 -C 3 alkyl, or C 1 -C 3 fluoroalkyl; R 4 of Formula (XLI) is selected from —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 )2, —N+(R 5 )3 or —OR 5 ; each R 5 of —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 )2, —N+(R 5 )3 and —OR 5 is independently selected from H, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 3 heteroalkyl and —C 1 -C 3 alkyl-(C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl); or: R 3 and R 5 of Formula (XLI) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; or: R 3 of Formula (XLI) is bonded to a nitrogen atom of U to form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; R 6 of Formula (XLI) is selected from —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O)2R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O)2NHR 7 , substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; each R 7 of —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 is independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), —(CH 2 )p-CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)2, —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)2, —(CH 2 ) P —CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); p of R 7 is selected from 0, 1 or 2; R 8a , R 8b , R 8c , and R 8d of C(R 8a )(R 8b ) and C(R 8c )(R 8d ) are independently selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, and substituted or unsubstituted aryl; or: R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together form a bond; or: R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-7 membered saturated, or partially saturated carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N, a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8c and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8a and R 8b together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8a and R 8b are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8d together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; where each substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, fused ring, spirocycle, heterospirocycle, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl is substituted with 1-3 R 9 ; and each R 9 of R 8a , R 8b , R 8c and R 8d is independently selected from halogen, —OH, —SH, (C═O), CN, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C1-C4fluoro alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkoxy, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)NH 2 , —C(═O)C 1 -C 3 alkyl, —S(═O) 2 CH 3 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-OH, —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-O—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH 2 ; —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , or two R 9 together with the atoms to which they are attached form a methylene dioxy or ethylene dioxy ring substituted or unsubstituted with halogen, —OH, or C 1 -C 3 alkyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XLII), which are derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2013/071039, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

W 1 of Formula (XLII) is O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8a )(R 8b ); W 2 of Formula (XLII) is O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8c )(R 8d ); provided that W 1 and W 2 are not both O, or both S; R 1 of Formula (XLII) is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); when X 1 of Formula (XLII) is N—R A , then X 2 is C═O, or CR 2c R 2d , and X 3 is CR 2a R 2b ; or: when X 1 of Formula (XLII) is selected from S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , then X 2 is CR 2c R 2d , and X 3 is CR 2a R 2b ; or: when X 1 of Formula (XLII) is O, then X 2 is CR 2c R 2d and N—R A and X 3 is CR 2a R 2b ; or: when X 1 of Formula (XLII) is CH 3 , then X 2 is selected from O, N—R A , S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , and X 3 is CR 2a R 2b ; when X 1 of Formula (XLII) is CR 2e R 2f and X 2 is CR 2c R 2d , and R 2e and R 2c together form a bond, and X 3 of Formula (VLII) is CR 2a R 2b ; or: X 1 and X 3 of Formula (XLII) are both CH 2 and X 2 of Formula (XLII) is C═O, C═C(R C )2, or C═NR C ; where each R C is independently selected from H, —CN, —OH, alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C6alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); or: X 1 and X 2 of Formula (XLII) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 3 is CR 2a R 2b ; or: X 2 and X 3 of Formula (XLII) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 1 of Formula (VLII) is CR 2e R 2f ; R A of N—R A is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, —C(═O)C 1 -C 2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , R 2d , R 2e , and R 2f of CR 2c R 2d , CR 2a R 2b and CR 2e R 2f are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl) and —C(═O)R B ; R B of —C(═O)R B is selected from substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or —NR D R E ; R D and R E of NR D R E are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); m of Formula (XLII) is selected from 0, 1 or 2; —U— of Formula (XLII) is selected from —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—, —NHS(═O) 2 —, —S(═O) 2 NH—, —NHC(═O)NH—, —NH(C═O)O—, —O(C═O)NH—, or —NHS(═O) 2 NH—; R 3 of Formula (XLII) is selected from C 1 -C 3 alkyl, or C 1 -C 3 fluoroalkyl; R 4 of Formula (XLII) is selected from —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 or —OR 5 ; each R 5 of —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 and —OR 5 is independently selected from H, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 3 heteroalkyl and —C 1 -C 3 alkyl-(C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl); or: R 3 and R 5 of Formula (XLII) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; or: R 3 of Formula (XLII) is bonded to a nitrogen atom of U to form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; R 6 of Formula (XLII) is selected from —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; each R 7 of —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 is independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), —(CH 2 )p-CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)2, —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)2, —(CH 2 ) P —CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); p of R 7 is selected from 0, 1 or 2; R 8a , R 8b , R 8c , and R 8d of C(R 8a )(R 8b ) and C(R 8c )(R 8d ) are independently selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, and substituted or unsubstituted aryl; or: R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together form a bond; or: R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-7 membered saturated, or partially saturated carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N, a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8c and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8a and R 8b together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8a and R 8b are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8d together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; where each substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, fused ring, spirocycle, heterospirocycle, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl is substituted with 1-3 R 9 ; and each R 9 of R 8a , R 8b , R 8c and R 8d is independently selected from halogen, —OH, —SH, (C═O), CN, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkoxy, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)NH 2 , —C(═O)C 1 -C 3 alkyl, —S(═O) 2 CH 3 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-OH, —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-O—(C-C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH 2 ; —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , or two R 9 together with the atoms to which they are attached form a methylene dioxy or ethylene dioxy ring substituted or unsubstituted with halogen, —OH, or C 1 -C 3 alkyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XLIII), which is derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2013/071039, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

W 1 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8a )(R 8b );

W 2 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8c )(R 8d ); provided that W 1 and W 2 are not both O, or both S;

R 1 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl);

when X 1 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from N—R A , S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , then X 2 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2 CR 2d , and X 3 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2a R 2b ;

or:

when X 1 of Formula (XLIII) is O, then X 2 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from O, N—R A , S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , and X 3 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2a R 2b ;

or:

when X 1 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2e R 2f and X 2 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2c R 2d , and R 2e and R 2c together form a bond, and X 3 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2a R 2b ;

or:

X 1 and X 2 of Formula (XLIII) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 3 of Formula (XLIII) is CR 2a R 2b ;

or:

X 2 and X 3 of Formula (XLIII) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 1 of Formula (VLII) is CR 2e R 2f ;

R A of N—R A is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, —C(═O)C 1 -C 2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , R 2d , R 2e , and R 2f of CR 2 CR 2 d, CR 2a R 2b and R 2e R 2f are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl) and —C(═O)R B ;

R B of —C(═O)R B is substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or —NR D R E ;

R D and R E of NR D R E are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl);

m of Formula (XLIII) is 0, 1 or 2;

—U— of Formula (XLIII) is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—, —NHS(═O) 2 —, —S(═O) 2 NH—, —NHC(═O)NH—, —NH(C═O)O—, —O(C═O)NH—, or —NHS(═O) 2 NH—;

R 3 of Formula (XLIII) is C 1 -C 3 alkyl, or C 1 -C 3 fluoroalkyl;

R 4 of Formula (XLIII) is —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 or —OR 5 ;

each R 5 of —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 and —OR 5 is independently selected from H, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 3 heteroalkyl and —C 1 -C 3 alkyl-(C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl);

or:

R 3 and R 5 of Formula (XLIII) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring;

or:

R 3 of Formula (XLIII) is bonded to a nitrogen atom of U to form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring;

R 6 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl;

each R 7 of —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 is independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl) 2 , —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl) 2 , —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl);

p of R 7 is 0, 1 or 2;

R 8a , R 8b , R 2c and R 8d of C(R 8a )(R 8b ) and C(R 8c )(R 8d ) are independently selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, and substituted or unsubstituted aryl;

or:

R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together form a bond;

or:

R 8a and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-7 membered saturated, or partially saturated carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N, a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N;

or:

R 8c and R 8d are as defined above, and R 8a and R 8b together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N;

or:

R 8a and R 8b are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8d together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N;

where each substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, fused ring, spirocycle, heterospirocycle, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl is substituted with 1-3 R 9 ; and

each R 9 of R 8a , R 8b , R 8c and R 8d is independently selected from halogen, —OH, —SH, (C═O), CN, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 fluoro alkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkoxy, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)NH 2 , —C(═O)C 1 -C 3 alkyl, —S(═O) 2 CH 3 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-OH, —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-O—(C-C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH 2 ; —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , or two R 9 together with the atoms to which they are attached form a methylene dioxy or ethylene dioxy ring substituted or unsubstituted with halogen, —OH, or C 1 -C 3 alkyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XLIV), which is derived from the IAP ligands described in WO Pub. No. 2013/071039, or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

W 1 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8a )(R 8b ); W 2 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8c )(R 8d ); provided that W 1 and W 2 are not both O, or both S; W 3 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from O, S, N—R A , or C(R 8e )(R 8f ), providing that the ring comprising W 1 , W 2 , and W 3 does not comprise two adjacent oxygen atoms or sulfer atoms; R 1 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); when X 1 of Formula (XLIV) is O, then X 2 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from CR 2c R 2d and N—R A , and X 3 of Formula (XLIV) is CR 2a R 2b ; or: when X 1 of Formula (XLIV) is CH 2 , then X 2 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from O, N—R A , S, S(O), or S(O) 2 , and X 3 of Formula (XLIV) is CR 2a R 2b ; or: when X 1 of Formula (XLIV) is CR 2e R 2f and X 2 of Formula (XLIV) is CR 2c R 2d , and R 2e and R 2c together form a bond, and X 3 of Formula (VLIV) is CR 2a R 2b ; or: X 1 and X 3 of Formula (XLIV) are both CH 2 and X 2 of Formula (XLII) is C═O, C═C(R C ) 2 , or C═NR C ; where each R C is independently selected from H, —CN, —OH, alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); or: X 1 and X 2 of Formula (XLIV) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 3 of Formula (XLIV) is CR 2a R 2b ; or: X 2 and X 3 of Formula (XLIV) are independently selected from C and N, and are members of a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered cycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted saturated or partially saturated 3-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a fused substituted or unsubstituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring, and X 1 of Formula (VLIV) is CR 2e R 2f ; R A of N—R A is selected from H, —C(═O)C 1 -C 2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; R 2a , R 2b , R 2c , R 2d , R 2e , and R 2f of CR 2c R 2d , CR 2a R 2b and CR 2e R 2f are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), (substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl) and —C(═O)R B ; R B of —C(═O)R B is selected from substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or —NR D R E ; R D and R E of NR D R E are independently selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 5 heterocycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); m of Formula (XLIV) is selected from 0, 1 or 2; —U— of Formula (XLIV) is selected from —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—, —NHS(═O) 2 —, —S(═O) 2 NH—, —NHC(═O)NH—, —NH(C═O)O—, —O(C═O)NH—, or —NHS(═O) 2 NH—; R 3 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from C 1 -C 3 alkyl, or C 1 -C 3 fluoroalkyl; R 4 of Formula (XLIV) is selected from —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 or —OR 5 ; each R 5 of —NHR 5 , —N(R 5 ) 2 , —N+(R 5 ) 3 and —OR 5 is independently selected from H, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, C 1 -C 3 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 3 heteroalkyl and —C 1 -C 3 alkyl-(C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl); or: R 3 and R 5 of Formula (XLIV) together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; or: R 3 of Formula (XLIII) is bonded to a nitrogen atom of U to form a substituted or unsubstituted 5-7 membered ring; R 6 of Formula (XLIII) is selected from —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; each R 7 of —NHC(═O)R 7 , —C(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-C(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 R 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-S(═O) 2 NHR 7 ; —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHC(═O)NHR 7 , —(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-NHS(═O) 2 NHR 7 is independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 haloalkyl, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C3-C10cycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 heterocycloalkyl, a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, a substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted C2-C10heterocycloalkyl, —C1-C6alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), —C 1 -C 6 alkyl-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), —(CH 2 )p-CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)2, —(CH 2 ) p —CH(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)2, —(CH 2 ) P —CH(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted aryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted aryl), or -(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl)-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl); p of R 7 is selected from 0, 1 or 2; R 8a , R 8b , R 8c , R 8d , R 8e , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ), C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are independently selected from H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 1 -C 6 heteroalkyl, and substituted or unsubstituted aryl; or: R 8a , R 8d , R 8e , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ), C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together form a bond; or: R 8a , R 8b , R 8d , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ), C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8e together form a bond; or: R 8a , R 8d , R 8e , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ), C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8b and R 8c together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-7 membered saturated, or partially saturated carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N, a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8a , R 8b , R 8d , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ), C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8e together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-7 membered saturated, or partially saturated carbocyclic ring or heterocyclic ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N, a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered aryl ring, or a substituted or unsubstituted fused 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8c , R 8d , R 8e , and R 8f of C(R 8c )(R 8d ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8a and R 8b together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8a , R 8b , R 8e , and R 8f of C(R 8a )(R 8b ) and C(R 8e )(R 8f ) are as defined above, and R 8c and R 8d together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: R 8a , R 8b , R 8c , and R 8d of C(R 8a )(R 8b ) and C(R 8c )(R 8d ) are as defined above, and R 8e and R 8f together with the atoms to which they are attached form a substituted or unsubstituted saturated, or partially saturated 3-7 membered spirocycle or heterospirocycle comprising 1-3 heteroatoms selected from S, O and N; or: where each substituted alkyl, heteroalkyl, fused ring, spirocycle, heterospirocycle, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl is substituted with 1-3 R 9 ; and each R 9 of R 8a , R 8b , R 8c , R 8d , R 8e , and R 8f is independently selected from halogen, —OH, —SH, (C═O), CN, C 1 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkyl, C 1 -C 4 alkoxy, C 1 -C 4 fluoroalkoxy, —NH 2 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , —C(═O)OH, —C(═O)NH 2 , —C(═O)C 1 -C 3 alkyl, —S(═O) 2 CH 3 , —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-OH, —NH(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-O—(C-C 4 alkyl), —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH 2 ; —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-NH—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl), and —O(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-N—(C 1 -C 4 alkyl) 2 , or two R 9 together with the atoms to which they are attached form a methylene dioxy or ethylene dioxy ring substituted or unsubstituted with halogen, —OH, or C 1 -C 3 alkyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (XLV), (XLVI) or (XLVII), which is derived from the IAP ligands described in Vamos, M., et al., Expedient synthesis of highly potent antagonists of inhibitor of apoptosis proteins ( IAPs ) with unique selectivity for ML - IAP , ACS Chem. Biol., 8(4), 725-32 (2013), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 2 , R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XLV) are independently selected from H or ME; X of Formula (XLV) is independently selected from O or S; and R 1 of Formula (XLV) is selected from:

In a particular embodiment, the ILM has a structure according to Formula (XLVIII):

wherein R 3 and R 4 of Formula (XLVIII) are independently selected from H or ME;

is a 5-member heteocycle selected from:

In a particular embodiment, the

of Formula XLVIII) is

In a particular embodiment, the ILM has a structure and attached to a linker group L as shown below:

In a particular embodiment, the ILM has a structure according to Formula (XLIX), (L), or (LI):

wherein:

R 3 of Formula (XLIX), (L) or (LI) are independently selected from H or ME;

is a 5-member heteocycle selected from:

and

L of Formula (XLIX), (L) or (LI) is selected from:

In a particular embodiment, L of Formula (XLIX), (L), or (LI)

In a particular embodiment, the ILM has a structure according to Formula (LII):

In a particular embodiment, the ILM according to Formula (LII) is chemically linked to the linker group L in the area denoted with

and as shown below:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (LIII) or (LIV), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Hennessy, E J, et al., Discovery of aminopiperidine - based Smac mimetics as IAP antagonists , Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 22(4), 1960-4 (2012), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formulas (LIII) and (LIV) is selected from:

R 2 of Formulas (LIII) and (LIV) is selected from H or Me;

R 3 of Formulas (LIII) and (LIV) is selected from:

X of is selected from H, halogen, methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, nitro or trifluoromethyl.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of and be chemically linked to the linker as shown in Formula (LV) or (LVI), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (LVII), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Cohen, F, et al., Orally bioavailable antagonists of inhibitor of apoptosis proteins based on an azabicyclooctane scaffold , J. Med. Chem., 52(6), 1723-30 (2009), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

R 1 of Formulas (LVII) is selected from:

X of

is selected from H, fluoro, methyl or methoxy.

In a particular embodiment, the ILM is represented by the following structure:

In a particular embodiment, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of, and which the chemical link between the ILM and linker group L is shown:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of the structures below, which are based on the IAP ligands described in Asano, M, et al., Design, sterioselective synthesis, and biological evaluation of novel tri - cyclic compounds as inhibitor of apoptosis proteins ( IAP ) antagonists , Bioorg. Med. Chem., 21(18): 5725-37 (2013), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

In a particular embodiment, the ILM is selected from the group consisting of, and which the chemical link between the ILM and linker group L is shown:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (LVIII), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Asano, M, et al., Design, sterioselective synthesis, and biological evaluation of novel tri - cyclic compounds as inhibitor of apoptosis proteins ( IAP ) antagonists , Bioorg. Med. Chem., 21(18): 5725-37 (2013), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein X of Formula (LVIII) is one or two substituents independently selected from H, halogen or cyano.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of and be chemically linked to the linker group L as shown in Formula (LIX) or (LX), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein X of Formula (LIX) and (LX) is one or two substituents independently selected from H, halogen or cyano, and; and L of Formulas (LIX) and (LX) is a linker group as described herein.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of Formula (LXI), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Ardecky, R J, et al., Design, sysnthesis and evaluation of inhibitor of apoptosis ( IAP ) antagonists that are highly selective for the BIR 2 domain of XIAP , Bioorg. Med. Chem., 23(14): 4253-7 (2013), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein:

of Formula (LXI) is a natural or unnatural amino acid; and

R 2 of Formula (LXI) is selected from:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure of and be chemically linked to the linker group L as shown in Formula (LXII) or (LLXIII), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

of Formula (LXI) is a natural or unnatural amino acid; and

L of Formula (LXI) is a linker group as described herein.

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM can have the structure selected from the group consisting of, which is based on the IAP ligands described in Wang, J, et al., Discovery of novel second mitochondrial - derived activator of caspase mimetics as selective inhibitor or apoptosis protein inhibitors , J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 349(2): 319-29 (2014), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

In any of the compounds described herein, the ILM has a structure according to Formula (LXIX), which is based on the IAP ligands described in Hird, A W, et al., Structure-based design and synthesis of tricyclic IAP (Inhibitors of Apoptosis Proteins) inhibitors, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 24(7): 1820-4 (2014), or an unnatural mimetic thereof:

wherein R of Formula LIX is selected from the group consisting of:

R 1 of

is selected from H or Me;

R 2 of

is selected from alkyl or cycloalkyl;

X of

is 1-2 substitutents independently selected from halogen, hydroxy, methoxy, nitro and trifluoromethyl

Z of

is O or NH;

HET of

is mono- or fused bicyclic heteroaryl; and

of Formula (LIX) is an optional double bond.

In a particular embodiment, the ILM of the compound has a chemical structure as represented by:

In a particular embodiment, the ILM of the compound has a chemical structure selected from the group consisting of:

The term “independently” is used herein to indicate that the variable, which is independently applied, varies independently from application to application.

The term “alkyl” shall mean within its context a linear, branch-chained or cyclic fully saturated hydrocarbon radical or alkyl group, preferably a C 1 -C 10 , more preferably a C 1 -C 6 , alternatively a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, which may be optionally substituted. Examples of alkyl groups are methyl, ethyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, n-octyl, n-nonyl, n-decyl, isopropyl, 2-methylpropyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl and cyclohexyl, among others. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is end-capped with a halogen group (At, Br, Cl, F, or I). In certain preferred embodiments, compounds according to the present disclosure which may be used to covalently bind to dehalogenase enzymes. These compounds generally contain a side chain (often linked through a polyethylene glycol group) which terminates in an alkyl group which has a halogen substituent (often chlorine or bromine) on its distal end which results in covalent binding of the compound containing such a moiety to the protein.

The term “Alkenyl” refers to linear, branch-chained or cyclic C 2 -C 10 (preferably C 2 -C 6 ) hydrocarbon radicals containing at least one C═C bond.

The term “Alkynyl” refers to linear, branch-chained or cyclic C 2 -C 10 (preferably C 2 -C 6 ) hydrocarbon radicals containing at least one C≡C bond.

The term “alkylene” when used, refers to a —(CH 2 ) n — group (n is an integer generally from 0-6), which may be optionally substituted. When substituted, the alkylene group preferably is substituted on one or more of the methylene groups with a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (including a cyclopropyl group or a t-butyl group), but may also be substituted with one or more halo groups, preferably from 1 to 3 halo groups or one or two hydroxyl groups, O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) groups or amino acid sidechains as otherwise disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, an alkylene group may be substituted with a urethane or alkoxy group (or other group) which is further substituted with a polyethylene glycol chain (of from 1 to 10, preferably 1 to 6, often 1 to 4 ethylene glycol units) to which is substituted (preferably, but not exclusively on the distal end of the polyethylene glycol chain) an alkyl chain substituted with a single halogen group, preferably a chlorine group. In still other embodiments, the alkylene (often, a methylene) group, may be substituted with an amino acid sidechain group such as a sidechain group of a natural or unnatural amino acid, for example, alanine, β-alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, cystine, glutamic acid, glutamine, glycine, phenylalanine, histidine, isoleucine, lysine, leucine, methionine, proline, serine, threonine, valine, tryptophan or tyrosine.

The term “unsubstituted” shall mean substituted only with hydrogen atoms. A range of carbon atoms which includes C 0 means that carbon is absent and is replaced with H. Thus, a range of carbon atoms which is C 0 -C 6 includes carbons atoms of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 and for C 0 , H stands in place of carbon.

The term “substituted” or “optionally substituted” shall mean independently (i.e., where more than substituent occurs, each substituent is independent of another substituent) one or more substituents (independently up to five substitutents, preferably up to three substituents, often 1 or 2 substituents on a moiety in a compound according to the present disclosure and may include substituents which themselves may be further substituted) at a carbon (or nitrogen) position anywhere on a molecule within context, and includes as substituents hydroxyl, thiol, carboxyl, cyano (C≡N), nitro (NO 2 ), halogen (preferably, 1, 2 or 3 halogens, especially on an alkyl, especially a methyl group such as a trifluoromethyl), an alkyl group (preferably, C 1 -C 10 , more preferably, C 1 -C 6 ), aryl (especially phenyl and substituted phenyl for example benzyl or benzoyl), alkoxy group (preferably, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl, including phenyl and substituted phenyl), thioether (C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl), acyl (preferably, C 1 -C 6 acyl), ester or thioester (preferably, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl) including alkylene ester (such that attachment is on the alkylene group, rather than at the ester function which is preferably substituted with a C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl group), preferably, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl, halogen (preferably, F or Cl), amine (including a five- or six-membered cyclic alkylene amine, further including a C 1 -C 6 alkyl amine or a C 1 -C 6 dialkyl amine which alkyl groups may be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups) or an optionally substituted —N(C 0 -C 6 alkyl)C(O)(O—C 1 -C 6 alkyl) group (which may be optionally substituted with a polyethylene glycol chain to which is further bound an alkyl group containing a single halogen, preferably chlorine substituent), hydrazine, amido, which is preferably substituted with one or two C 1 -C 6 alkyl groups (including a carboxamide which is optionally substituted with one or two C 1 -C 6 alkyl groups), alkanol (preferably, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl), or alkanoic acid (preferably, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or aryl). Substituents according to the present disclosure may include, for example —SiR 1 R 2 R 3 groups where each of R 1 and R 2 is as otherwise described herein and R 3 is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, preferably R 1 , R 2 , R 3 in this context is a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group (including an isopropyl or t-butyl group). Each of the above-described groups may be linked directly to the substituted moiety or alternatively, the substituent may be linked to the substituted moiety (preferably in the case of an aryl or heteraryl moiety) through an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m — or alternatively an optionally substituted —(OCH 2 ) m —, —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) m — or —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m — group, which may be substituted with any one or more of the above-described substituents. Alkylene groups —(CH 2 ) m — or —(CH 2 ) n — groups or other chains such as ethylene glycol chains, as identified above, may be substituted anywhere on the chain. Preferred substitutents on alkylene groups include halogen or C 1 -C 6 (preferably C 1 -C 3 ) alkyl groups, which may be optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, one or two ether groups (O—C 1 -C 6 groups), up to three halo groups (preferably F), or a sideshain of an amino acid as otherwise described herein and optionally substituted amide (preferably carboxamide substituted as described above) or urethane groups (often with one or two C 0 -C 6 alkyl substitutents, which group(s) may be further substituted). In certain embodiments, the alkylene group (often a single methylene group) is substituted with one or two optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl groups, preferably C 1 -C 4 alkyl group, most often methyl or O-methyl groups or a sidechain of an amino acid as otherwise described herein. In the present disclosure, a moiety in a molecule may be optionally substituted with up to five substituents, preferably up to three substituents. Most often, in the present disclosure moieties which are substituted are substituted with one or two substituents.

The term “substituted” (each substituent being independent of any other substituent) shall also mean within its context of use C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, halogen, amido, carboxamido, sulfone, including sulfonamide, keto, carboxy, C 1 -Chester (oxyester or carbonylester), C 1 -C 6 keto, urethane —O—C(O)—NR 1 R 2 or —N(R 1 )—C(O)—O—R 1 , nitro, cyano and amine (especially including a C 1 -C 6 alkylene-NR 1 R 2 , a mono- or di-C 1 -C 6 alkyl substituted amines which may be optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups). Each of these groups contain unless otherwise indicated, within context, between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. In certain embodiments, preferred substituents will include for example, —NH—, —NHC(O)—, —O—, ═O, —(CH 2 ) m — (here, m and n are in context, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6), —S—, —S(O)—, SO 2 — or —NH—C(O)—NH—, —(CH 2 ) n OH, —(CH 2 ) n SH, —(CH 2 ) n COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(CH 2 ) n OC(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(CH 2 ) n C(O)O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(CH 2 ) n NHC(O)—R 1 , —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—NR 1 R 2 , —(OCH 2 ) n OH, —(CH 2 O) n COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, —(OCH 2 ) n O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(CH 2 O) n C(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), —(OCH 2 ) n NHC(O)—R 1 , —(CH 2 O) n C(O)—NR 1 R 2 , —S(O) 2 —R S , —S(O)—R S (R S is C 1 -C 6 alkyl or a —(CH 2 ) m —NR 1 R 2 group), NO 2 , CN or halogen (F, Cl, Br, I, preferably F or Cl), depending on the context of the use of the substituent. R 1 and R 2 are each, within context, H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (which may be optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen groups, preferably fluorine). The term “substituted” shall also mean, within the chemical context of the compound defined and substituent used, an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group or an optionally substituted heterocyclic group as otherwise described herein. Alkylene groups may also be substituted as otherwise disclosed herein, preferably with optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl groups (methyl, ethyl or hydroxymethyl or hydroxyethyl is preferred, thus providing a chiral center), a sidechain of an amino acid group as otherwise described herein, an amido group as described hereinabove, or a urethane group O—C(O)—NR 1 R 2 group where R 1 and R 2 are as otherwise described herein, although numerous other groups may also be used as substituents. Various optionally substituted moieties may be substituted with 3 or more substituents, preferably no more than 3 substituents and preferably with 1 or 2 substituents. It is noted that in instances where, in a compound at a particular position of the molecule substitution is required (principally, because of valency), but no substitution is indicated, then that substituent is construed or understood to be H, unless the context of the substitution suggests otherwise.

The term “aryl” or “aromatic”, in context, refers to a substituted (as otherwise described herein) or unsubstituted monovalent aromatic radical having a single ring (e.g., benzene, phenyl, benzyl) or condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl, anthracenyl, phenanthrenyl, etc.) and can be bound to the compound according to the present disclosure at any available stable position on the ring(s) or as otherwise indicated in the chemical structure presented. Other examples of aryl groups, in context, may include heterocyclic aromatic ring systems, “heteroaryl” groups having one or more nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur atoms in the ring (moncyclic) such as imidazole, furyl, pyrrole, furanyl, thiene, thiazole, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, triazole, oxazole or fused ring systems such as indole, quinoline, indolizine, azaindolizine, benzofurazan, etc., among others, which may be optionally substituted as described above. Among the heteroaryl groups which may be mentioned include nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups such as pyrrole, pyridine, pyridone, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, pyrazole, imidazole, triazole, triazine, tetrazole, indole, isoindole, indolizine, azaindolizine, purine, indazole, quinoline, dihydroquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, dihydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroisoquinoline, quinolizine, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, imidazopyridine, imidazotriazine, pyrazinopyridazine, acridine, phenanthridine, carbazole, carbazoline, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenacene, oxadiazole, benzimidazole, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine and pyridopyrimidine; sulfur-containing aromatic heterocycles such as thiophene and benzothiophene; oxygen-containing aromatic heterocycles such as furan, pyran, cyclopentapyran, benzofuran and isobenzofuran; and aromatic heterocycles comprising 2 or more hetero atoms selected from among nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen, such as thiazole, thiadizole, isothiazole, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, benzothiadiazole, phenothiazine, isoxazole, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrazoloxazole, imidazothiazole, thienofuran, furopyrrole, pyridoxazine, furopyridine, furopyrimidine, thienopyrimidine and oxazole, among others, all of which may be optionally substituted.

The term “substituted aryl” refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group comprised of at least one aromatic ring or of multiple condensed rings at least one of which being aromatic, wherein the ring(s) are substituted with one or more substituents. For example, an aryl group can comprise a substituent(s) selected from: —(CH 2 ) n OH, —(CH 2 ) n —O—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n —C(O)(C 0 -C 6 ) alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n —C(O)O(C 0 -C 6 )alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n —OC(O)(C 0 -C 6 )alkyl, amine, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) amine wherein the alkyl group on the amine is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 hydroxyl groups or up to three halo (preferably F, Cl) groups, OH, COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, preferably CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 , or CN group (each of which may be substituted in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), an optionally substituted phenyl group (the phenyl group itself is preferably connected/attached to a PTM group, including a ULM group, via a linker group), and/or at least one of F, Cl, OH, COOH, CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 , or CN group (in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), a naphthyl group, which may be optionally substituted, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, preferably an optionally substituted isoxazole including a methylsubstituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted oxazole including a methylsubstituted oxazole, an optionally substituted thiazole including a methyl substituted thiazole, an optionally substituted isothiazole including a methyl substituted isothiazole, an optionally substituted pyrrole including a methylsubstituted pyrrole, an optionally substituted imidazole including a methylimidazole, an optionally substituted benzimidazole or methoxybenzylimidazole, an optionally substituted oximidazole or methyloximidazole, an optionally substituted diazole group, including a methyldiazole group, an optionally substituted triazole group, including a methylsubstituted triazole group, an optionally substituted pyridine group, including a halo- (preferably, F) or methylsubstitutedpyridine group or an oxapyridine group (where the pyridine group is linked to the phenyl group by an oxygen), an optionally substituted furan, an optionally substituted benzofuran, an optionally substituted dihydrobenzofuran, an optionally substituted indole, indolizine or azaindolizine (2, 3, or 4-azaindolizine), an optionally substituted quinoline, and combinations thereof.

“Carboxyl” denotes the group —C(O)OR, where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, whereas these generic substituents have meanings which are identical with definitions of the corresponding groups defined herein.

The term “heteroaryl” or “hetaryl” can mean but is in no way limited to an optionally substituted quinoline (which may be attached to the pharmacophore or substituted on any carbon atom within the quinoline ring), an optionally substituted indole (including dihydroindole), an optionally substituted indolizine, an optionally substituted azaindolizine (2, 3 or 4-azaindolizine) an optionally substituted benzimidazole, benzodiazole, benzoxofuran, an optionally substituted imidazole, an optionally substituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted oxazole (preferably methyl substituted), an optionally substituted diazole, an optionally substituted triazole, a tetrazole, an optionally substituted benzofuran, an optionally substituted thiophene, an optionally substituted thiazole (preferably methyl and/or thiol substituted), an optionally substituted isothiazole, an optionally substituted triazole (preferably a 1,2,3-triazole substituted with a methyl group, a triisopropylsilyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m —O—C 1 -C 6 alkyl group or an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m —C(O)—O—C 1 -C 6 alkyl group), an optionally substituted pyridine (2-, 3, or 4-pyridine) or a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

S c is CHR SS , NR URE ; or O; R HET is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl); R SS is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably F or Cl), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups), optionally substituted O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups); R URE is H, a C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl) or a —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), each of which groups is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen, preferably fluorine groups, or an optionally substituted heterocycle, for example piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, piperidine, piperazine, each of which is optionally substituted, and Y C is N or C—R YC , where R YC is H, OH, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl).

The terms “aralkyl” and “heteroarylalkyl” refer to groups that comprise both aryl or, respectively, heteroaryl as well as alkyl and/or heteroalkyl and/or carbocyclic and/or heterocycloalkyl ring systems according to the above definitions.

The term “arylalkyl” as used herein refers to an aryl group as defined above appended to an alkyl group defined above. The arylalkyl group is attached to the parent moiety through an alkyl group wherein the alkyl group is one to six carbon atoms. The aryl group in the aryalkyl group may be substituted as defined above.

The term “Heterocycle” refers to a cyclic group which contains at least one heteroatom, e.g., N, O or S, and may be aromatic (heteroaryl) or non-aromatic. Thus, the heteroaryl moieties are subsumed under the definition of heterocycle, depending on the context of its use. Exemplary heteroaryl groups are described hereinabove.

Exemplary heterocyclics include: azetidinyl, benzimidazolyl, 1,4-benzodioxanyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothienyl, dihydroimidazolyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydrofuranyl, dioxanyl, dioxolanyl, ethyleneurea, 1,3-dioxolane, 1,3-dioxane, 1,4-dioxane, furyl, homopiperidinyl, imidazolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, indolinyl, indolyl, isoquinolinyl, isothiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isoxazolidinyl, isoxazolyl, morpholinyl, naphthyridinyl, oxazolidinyl, oxazolyl, pyridone, 2-pyrrolidone, pyridine, piperazinyl, N-methylpiperazinyl, piperidinyl, phthalimide, succinimide, pyrazinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyridyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinoline, thiazolidinyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, tetrahydrothiophene, oxane, oxetanyl, oxathiolanyl, thiane among others.

Heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with a member selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, substituted amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, oxyaminoacyl, azido, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, thioketo, carboxy, carboxyalkyl, thioaryloxy, thioheteroaryloxy, thioheterocyclooxy, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heterocyclic, heterocyclooxy, hydroxyamino, alkoxyamino, nitro, —SO-alkyl, —SO-substituted alkyl, —SOaryl, —SO-heteroaryl, —SO2-alkyl, —SO2-substituted alkyl, —SO2-aryl, oxo (═O), and —SO2-heteroaryl. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Examples of nitrogen heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, morpholino, piperidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like as well as N-alkoxy-nitrogen containing heterocycles. The term “heterocyclic” also includes bicyclic groups in which any of the heterocyclic rings is fused to a benzene ring or a cyclohexane ring or another heterocyclic ring (for example, indolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, and the like).

The term “cycloalkyl” can mean but is in no way limited to univalent groups derived from monocyclic or polycyclic alkyl groups or cycloalkanes, as defined herein, e.g., saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon groups having from three to twenty carbon atoms in the ring, including, but not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl and the like. The term “substituted cycloalkyl” can mean but is in no way limited to a monocyclic or polycyclic alkyl group and being substituted by one or more substituents, for example, amino, halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, carbyloxy, carbylmercapto, aryl, nitro, mercapto or sulfo, whereas these generic substituent groups have meanings which are identical with definitions of the corresponding groups as defined in this legend.

“Heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic alkyl group in which at least one ring carbon atom of its cyclic structure being replaced with a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of N, O, S or P. “Substituted heterocycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic alkyl group in which at least one ring carbon atom of its cyclic structure being replaced with a heteroatom selected from the group consisting of N, O, S or P and the group is containing one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, carbyloxy, carbylmercapto, aryl, nitro, mercapto or sulfo, whereas these generic substituent group have meanings which are identical with definitions of the corresponding groups as defined in this legend.

The term “hydrocarbyl” shall mean a compound which contains carbon and hydrogen and which may be fully saturated, partially unsaturated or aromatic and includes aryl groups, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups and alkynyl groups.

The term “independently” is used herein to indicate that the variable, which is independently applied, varies independently from application to application.

The term “lower alkyl” refers to methyl, ethyl or propyl

The term “lower alkoxy” refers to methoxy, ethoxy or propoxy.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the W, X, Y, Z, G, G′, R, R′, R″, Q1-Q4, A, and Rn can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached one or more PTM, ULM, ILM or ILM′ groups.

Exemplary MLMs

In certain additional embodiments, the MLM of the bifunctional compound comprises chemical moieties such as substituted imidazolines, substituted spiro-indolinones, substituted pyrrolidines, substituted piperidinones, substituted morpholinones, substituted pyrrolopyrimidines, substituted imidazolopyridines, substituted thiazoloimidazoline, substituted pyrrolopyrrolidinones, and substituted isoquinolinones.

In additional embodiments, the MLM comprises the core structures mentioned above with adjacent bis-aryl substitutions positioned as cis- or trans-configurations.

In still additional embodiments, the MLM comprises part of structural features as in RG7112, RG7388, SAR405838, AMG-232, AM-7209, DS-5272, MK-8242, and NVP-CGM-097, and analogs or derivatives thereof.

In certain preferred embodiments, MLM is a derivative of substituted imidazoline represented as Formula (A-1), or thiazoloimidazoline represented as Formula (A-2), or spiro indolinone represented as Formula (A-3), or pyrollidine represented as Formula (A-4), or piperidinone/morphlinone represented as Formula (A-5), or isoquinolinone represented as Formula (A-6), or pyrollopyrimidine/imidazolopyridine represented as Formula (A-7), or pyrrolopyrrolidinone/imidazolopyrrolidinone represented as Formula (A-8).

wherein above Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8),

X of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, sulfur, sulfoxide, sulfone, and N—R a ;

R a is independently H or an alkyl group with carbon number 1 to 6;

Y and Z of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently carbon or nitrogen; A, A′ and A″ of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently selected from C, N, O or S, can also be one or two atoms forming a fused bicyclic ring, or a 6,5- and 5,5-fused aromatic bicyclic group; R 1 , R 2 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently selected from the group consisting of an aryl or heteroaryl group, a heteroaryl group having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from sulfur or nitrogen, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl group can be mono-cyclic or bi-cyclic, or unsubstituted or substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:

halogen, —CN, C1 to C6 alkyl group, C3 to C6 cycloalkyl, —OH, alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, fluorine substituted alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfoxide with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfone with 1 to 6 carbons, ketone with 2 to 6 carbons, amides with 2 to 6 carbons, and dialkyl amine with 2 to 6 carbons;

R 3 , R 4 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently selected from the group consisting of H, methyl and C1 to C6 alkyl; R 5 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of an aryl or heteroaryl group, a heteroaryl group having one or two heteroatoms independently selected from sulfur or nitrogen, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl group can be mono-cyclic or bi-cyclic, or unsubstituted or substituted with one to three substituents independently selected from the group consisting of:

halogen, —CN, C1 to C6 alkyl group, C3 to C6 cycloalkyl, —OH, alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, fluorine substituted alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfoxide with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfone with 1 to 6 carbons, ketone with 2 to 6 carbons, amides with 2 to 6 carbons, dialkyl amine with 2 to 6 carbons, alkyl ether (C2 to C6), alkyl ketone (C3 to C6), morpholinyl, alkyl ester (C3 to C6), alkyl cyanide (C3 to C6);

R 6 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is H or —C(═O)R b , wherein

R b of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, mono-, di- or tri-substituted aryl or heteroaryl, 4-morpholinyl, 1-(3-oxopiperazunyl), 1-piperidinyl, 4-N—R c -morpholinyl, 4-R c -1-piperidinyl, and 3-R c -1-piperidinyl, wherein R c of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, fluorine substituted alkyl, cyano alkyl, hydroxyl-substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, amide alkyl, alkyl sulfone, alkyl sulfoxide, alkyl amide, aryl, heteroaryl, mono-, bis- and tri-substituted aryl or heteroaryl, CH2CH2R d , and CH2CH2CH2R d , wherein R d of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, alkyl sulfone, alkyl sulfoxide, N-substituted carboxamide, —NHC(O)— alkyl, —NH—SO 2 -alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl;

R 7 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of H, C1 to C6 alkyl, cyclic alkyl, fluorine substituted alkyl, cyano substituted alkyl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl or aryl, substituted 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl or aryl; R 8 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of —R e —C(O)—R f , —R e -alkoxy, —R e -aryl, —R e -heteroaryl, and —R e —C(O)—R f —C(O)—R g , wherein:

R e of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is an alkylene with 1 to 6 carbons, or a bond; R f of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is a substituted 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; R g of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or heteroaryl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle;

R 9 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of a mono-, bis- or tri-substituent on the fused bicyclic aromatic ring in Formula (A-3), wherein the substitutents are independently selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkene, alkyne, alkyl, unsubstituted or substituted with Cl or F; R 10 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of an aryl or heteroaryl group, wherein the heteroaryl group can contain one or two heteroatoms as sulfur or nitrogen, aryl or heteroaryl group can be mono-cyclic or bi-cyclic, the aryl or heteroaryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with one to three substituents, including a halogen, F, Cl, —CN, alkene, alkyne, C 1 to C 6 alkyl group, C 1 to C 6 cycloalkyl, —OH, alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, fluorine substituted alkoxy with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfoxide with 1 to 6 carbons, sulfone with 1 to 6 carbons, ketone with 2 to 6 carbons; R 11 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is —C(O)—N(R h )(R i ), wherein R h and R i are selected from groups consisting of the following:

H; optionally substituted linear or branched C1 to C6 alkyl; alkoxy substituted alkyl; mono- and di-hydroxy substituted alkyl (e.g., a C3 to C6), sulfone substituted alkyl; optionally substituted aryl; optionally substituted heteraryl; mono-, bis- or tri-substituted aryl or heteroaryl; phenyl-4-carboxylic acid; substituted phenyl-4-carboxylic acid, alkyl carboxylic acid; optionally substituted heteroaryl carboxylic acid; alkyl carboxylic acid; fluorine substituted alkyl carboxylic acid; optionally substituted cycloalky, 3-hydroxycyclobutane, 4-hydroxycyclohehexane, aryl substituted cycloalkyl; heteroaryl substituted cycloalkyl; or Rh and Ri taken together form a ring;

R 12 and R 13 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently selected from H, lower alkyl (C1 to C6), lower alkenyl (C2 to C6), lower alkynyl (C2 to C6), cycloalkyl (4, 5 and 6-membered ring), substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, 5- and 6-membered aryl and heteroaryl, R 12 and R 13 can be connected to form a 5- and 6-membered ring with or without substitution on the ring; R 14 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocycle, substituted heterocycle, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and substituted cycloalkenyl; R 15 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is CN; R 16 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C1-6 alkyl or C3-6 cycloalkyl with one or multiple hydrogens replaced by fluorine, alkyl or cycloalkyl with one CH 2 replaced by S(═O), —S, or —S(═O) 2 , alkyl or cycloalkyl with terminal CH 3 replaced by S(═O) 2 N(alkyl)(alkyl), —C(═O)N(alkyl)(alkyl), —N(alkyl)S(═O) 2 (alkyl), —C(═O)2(allkyl), —O(alkyl), C1-6 alkyl or alkyl-cycloalkyl with hydron replaced by hydroxyl group, a 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl, optionally containing a —(C═O)— group, or a 5 to 6 membered aryl or heteroaryl group, which heterocycloalkyl or heteroaryl group can contain from one to three heteroatoms independently selected from O, N or S, and the cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted with from one to three substituents independently selected from halogen, C1-6 alkyl groups, hydroxylated C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkyl containing thioether, ether, sulfone, sulfoxide, fluorine substituted ether or cyano group; R 17 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of (CH 2 )nC(O)NR k R l , wherein R k and R l are independently selected from H, C1-6 alkyl, hydrxylated C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy alkyl, C1-6 alkyl with one or multiple hydrogens replaced by fluorine, C1-6 alkyl with one carbon replaced by S(O), S(O)(O), C1-6 alkoxyalkyl with one or multiple hydrogens replaced by fluorine, C1-6 alkyl with hydrogen replaced by a cyano group, 5 and 6 membered aryl or heteroaryl, aklyl aryl with alkyl group containing 1-6 carbons, and alkyl heteroaryl with alkyl group containing 1-6 carbons, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl group can be further substituted; R 18 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of substituted aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, the substitution is preferably —N(C1-4 alkyl)(cycloalkyl), —N(C1-4 alkyl)alkyl-cycloalkyl, and —N(C1-4 alkyl)[alkyl)-(heterocycle-substituted)-cycloalkyl]; R 19 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, bicyclic heteroaryl, and these aryl or hetroaryl groups can be substituted with halogen, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 cycloalkyl, CF 3 , F, CN, alkyne, alkyl sulfone, the halogen substitution can be mon-bis- or tri-substituted; R 20 and R 21 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are independently selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 cycloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, hydoxylated C1-6 alkoxy, and fluorine substituted C1-6 alkoxy, wherein R 20 and R 21 can further be connected to form a 5, 6 and 7-membered cyclic or heterocyclic ring, which can further be substituted; R 22 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 cycloalkyl, carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid ester, amide, reverse amide, sulfonamide, reverse sulfonamide, N-acyl urea, nitrogen-containing 5-membered heterocycle, the 5-membered heterocycles can be further substituted with C1-6 alkyl, alkoxy, fluorine-substituted alkyl, CN, and alkylsulfone; R 23 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from aryl, heteroaryl, —O-aryl, —O— heteroaryl, —O-alkyl, —O-alkyl-cycloalkyl, —NH-alkyl, —NH-alkyl-cycloalkyl, —N(H)-aryl, —N(H)-heteroaryl, —N(alkyl)-aryl, —N(alkyl)-heteroaryl, the aryl or heteroaryl groups can be substituted with halogen, C1-6 alkyl, hydoxylated C1-6 alkyl, cycloalkyl, fluorine-substituted C1-6 alkyl, CN, alkoxy, alkyl sulfone, amide and sulfonamide; R 24 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of —CH 2 —(C1-6 alkyl), —CH 2 -cycloalkyl, —CH 2 -aryl, CH 2 -heteroaryl, where alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl and heteroaryl can be substituted with halogen, alkoxy, hydoxylated alkyl, cyano-substituted alkyl, cycloalyl and substituted cycloalkyl; R 25 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkyl-cycloalkyl, alkoxy-substituted alkyl, hydroxylated alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or heteroaryl, 5,6, and 7-membered nitrogen-containing saturated heterocycles, 5,6-fused and 6,6-fused nitrogen-containing saturated heterocycles and these saturated heterocycles can be substituted with C1-6 alkyl, fluorine-substituted C1-6 alkyl, alkoxy, aryl and heteroaryl group; R 26 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C 3 -6 cycloalkyl, the alkyl or cycloalkyl can be substituted with —OH, alkoxy, fluorine-substituted alkoxy, fluorine-substituted alkyl, —NH 2 , —NH-alkyl, NH—C(O)alkyl, —NH—S(O) 2 -alkyl, and —S(O) 2 -alkyl; R 27 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of aryl, heteroaryl, bicyclic heteroaryl, wherein the aryl or heteroaryl groups can be substituted with C1-6 alkyl, alkoxy, NH2, NH-alkyl, halogen, or —CN, and the substitution can be independently mono-, bis- and tri-substitution; R 28 of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of aryl, 5 and 6-membered heteroaryl, bicyclic heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, saturated heterocycle such as piperidine, piperidinone, tetrahydropyran, N-acyl-piperidine, wherein the cycloalkyl, saturated heterocycle, aryl or heteroaryl can be further substituted with —OH, alkoxy, mono-, bis- or tri-substitution including halogen, —CN, alkyl sulfone, and fluorine substituted alkyl groups; and R 1″ of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl substituted alkyl, alkoxy substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl-substituted cycloalkyl, and alkoxy substituted cycloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, the heterocycles in R f and R g of Formula (A-1) through Formula (A-8) are substituted pyrrolidine, substituted piperidine, substituted piperizine.

More specifically, non-limiting examples of MLMs include those shown below as well as those ‘hybrid’ molecules that arise from the combination of 1 or more of the different features shown in the molecules below.

Using MLM in Formula A-1 through A-8, the following PROTACs can be prepared to target a particular protein for degradation, where ‘L” is a connector (i.e. a linker group), and “PTM” is a ligand binding to a target protein.

In certain embodiments, the description provides a bifunctional molecule comprising a structure selected from the group consisting of:

wherein X, R a , Y, Z, A, A′, A″, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 6 , R b , R c , R d , R 7 , R e , R f , R g , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 16 , R 17 , R k , R l , R 18 , R 19 , R 20 , R 21 , R 22 , R 23 , R 24 , R 25 , R 26 , R 27 , R 28 , and R 1″ are as defined herein with regard to Formulas (A-1) through (A-8).

In certain embodiments, the description provides bifunctional or chimeric molecules with the structure: PTM-L-MLM, wherein PTM is a protein target binding moiety coupled to an MLM by L, wherein L is a bond (i.e., absent) or a chemical linker. In certain embodiments, the MLM has a structure selected from the group consisting of A-1-1, A-1-2, A-1-3, and A-1-4:

wherein:

R1′ and R2′ of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 (i.e., A-1-1, A-1-2, A-1-3, and A-1-4) are independently selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, Br, I, acetylene, CN, CF 3 and NO 2 ; R3′ is selected from the group consisting of —OCH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 2 F, —OCH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 , and —OCH(CH 3 ) 2 ; R4′ of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, —CH 3 , —CF 3 , —OCH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 3 , —CH(CH 3 ) 2 , -cyclopropyl, —CN, —C(CH 3 ) 2 OH, —C(CH 3 ) 2 OCH 2 CH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OH, —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 2 OH, —C(CH 3 ) 2 CH 2 OCH 2 CH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 CN, —C(CH 3 ) 2 C(O)CH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 C(O)NHCH 3 , —C(CH 3 ) 2 C(O)N(CH 3 ) 2 , —SCH 3 , —SCH 2 CH 3 , —S(O) 2 CH 3 , —S(O 2 )CH 2 CH 3 , —NHC(CH 3 ) 3 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , pyrrolidinyl, and 4-morpholinyl; R5′ of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 is selected from the group consisting of halogen, -cyclopropyl, —S(O) 2 CH 3 , —S(O) 2 CH 2 CH 3 , 1-pyrrolidinyl, —NH 2 , —N(CH 3 ) 2 , and —NHC(CH 3 ) 3 ; and R6′ of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 is selected from the structures presented below where the linker connection point is indicated as “*”. Beside R6′ as the point for linker attachment, R4′ can also serve as the linker attachment position. In the case that R4′ is the linker connection site, linker will be connected to the terminal atom of R4′ groups shown above.

In certain embodiments, the linker connection position of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 is at least one of R4′ or R6′ or both.

In certain embodiments, R6′ of Formulas A-1-1 throught A-1-4 is independently selected from the group consisting of H,

wherein “*” indicates the point of attachment of the linker.

In certain embodiments, the linker of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is attached to at least one of R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′, R5′, R6′, or a combination thereof.

In certain embodiments, the description provides bifunctional or chimeric molecules with the structure: PTM-L-MLM, wherein PTM is a protein target binding moiety coupled to an MLM by L, wherein L is a bond (i.e., absent) or a chemical linker. In certain embodiments, the MLM has a structure selected from the group consisting of A-4-1, A-4-2, A-4-3, A-4-4, A-4-5, and A-4-6:

wherein:

R7′ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 (i.e., A-4-1, A-4-2, A-4-3, A-4-4, A-4-5, and A-4-6) is one or more (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4) halogens; R8′ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is one or more groups (e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups) selected from the group consisting of H, —F, —Cl, —Br, —I, —CN, —NO 2 , ethylnyl, cyclopropyl, methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, vinyl, methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, —OH, other C1-6 alkyl, other C1-6 alkenyl, and C1-6 alkynyl, mono-, di- or tri-substituted; R9′ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, and substituted cycloalkenyl; Z of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is selected from the group consisting of H, —OCH 3 , —OCH 2 CH 3 , and halogen; R10′ and R11′ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 are each independently selected from the group consisting of H, (CH 2 ) n —R′, (CH 2 ) n —NR′R″, (CH 2 ) n —NR′COR″, (CH 2 ) n —NR′SO 2 R″, (CH 2 ) n —COOH, (CH 2 ) n —COOR′, (CH) n —CONR′R″, (CH 2 ) n —OR′, (CH 2 ) n —SR′, (CH 2 ) n —SOR′, (CH 2 ) n —CH(OH)—R′, (CH 2 ) n , —COR′, (CH 2 ) n —SO 2 R′, (CH 2 ) n —SONR′R″, (CH 2 ) n —SO 2 NR′R″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —R′, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —OH, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —OR′, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —NR′R″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —NR′COR″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m (CH 2 ) n —NR′SO 2 R″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m (CH 2 ) n —COOH, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m (CH 2 ) n —COOR′, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —CONR′R″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SO 2 R′, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —COR′, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SONR′R″, (CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SO 2 NR′R″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n R′, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —OH, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —OR′, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —NR′R″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —NR′COR″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —NR′SO 2 R″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —COOH, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —COOR′, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —CONR′R″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SO 2 R′, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —COR′, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SONR′R″, (CH 2 ) p —(CH 2 CH 2 O) m —(CH 2 ) n —SO 2 NR′R″, Aryl-(CH 2 ) n —COOH, and heteroaryl-alkyl-CO-alkyl-NR′R″m, wherein the alkyl may be substituted with OR′, and heteroaryl-(CH 2 ) m -heterocycle wherein the heterocycle may optionally be substituted with alkyl, hydroxyl, COOR′ and COR′; wherein R′ and R″ are selected from H, alkyl, alkyl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, NH 2 , NH(alkyl), N(alkyl) 2 , oxo, carboxy, clcloalkyl and heteroaryl; m, n, and p are independently 0 to 6; R12′ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is selected from the group consisting of —O-(alkyl), —O-(alkyl)-akoxy, —C(O)-(alkyl), —C(OH)-alkyl-alkoxy, —C(O)—NH-(alkyl), —C(O)—N-(alkyl) 2 , —S(O)-(alkyl), S(O) 2 -(alkyl), —C(O)-(cyclic amine), and —O-aryl-(alkyl), —O-aryl-(alkoxy); R1″ of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, aryl substitituted alkyl, aloxy substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, ary-substituted cycloalkyl, and alkoxy substituted cycloalkyl.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the alkyl, alkoxy or the like can be a lower alkyl or lower alkoxy.

In certain embodiments, the linker connection position of Formula A-4-1 through A-4-6 is at least one of Z, R8′, R9′, R10′, R11″, R12″, or R1″.

The method used to design chimeric molecules as presented in A-1-1 through A-1-4, A-4-1 through A-4-6 can be applied to MLM with formula A-2, A-3, A-5, A-6, A-7 and A-8, wherein the solvent exposed area in the MLM can be connected to linker “L” which will be attached to target protein ligand “PTM”, to construct PROTACs.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the MLM is selected from:

Exemplary MDM2 binding moieties include, but not limited, the following:

1. The HDM2/MDM2 inhibitors identified in Vassilev, et al., In vivo activation of the p53 pathway by small-molecule antagonists of MDM2 , SCIENCE vol:303, pag:844-848 (2004), and Schneekloth, et al., Targeted intracellular protein degradation induced by a small molecule: En route to chemical proteomics, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 18 (2008) 5904-5908, including (or additionally) the compounds nutlin-3, nutlin-2, and nutlin-1 (derivatized) as described below, as well as all derivatives and analogs thereof:

(derivatized where a linker group L or a -(L-MLM)group is attached, for example, at the methoxy group or as a hydroxyl group);

(derivatized where a linker group L or a -(L-MLM) group is attached, for example, at the methoxy group or hydroxyl group);

(derivatized where a linker group L or a -(L-MLM) group is attached, for example, via the methoxy group or as a hydroxyl group); and

2. Trans-4-Iodo-4′-Boranyl-Chalcone

(derivatized where a linker group L or a a linker group L or a-(L-MLM) group is attached, for example, via a hydroxy group).

Exemplary CLMs

Neo-imide Compounds

In one aspect the description provides compounds useful for binding and/or inhibiting cereblon. In certain embodiments, the compound is selected from the group consisting of chemical structures:

wherein:

W of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group CH 2 , CHR, C═O, SO 2 , NH, and N-alkyl; X of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group O, S and H 2 , Y of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group CH 2 , —C═CR′, NH, N-alkyl, N-aryl, N-hetaryl, N-cycloalkyl, N-heterocyclyl, O, and S; Z of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group O, and S or H 2 except that both X and Z cannot be H 2 , G and G′ of Formulas (a) through (f) are independently selected from the group H, optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl, OH, R′OCOOR, R′OCONRR″, CH 2 -heterocyclyl optionally substituted with R′, and benzyl optionally substituted with R′; Q1-Q4 of Formulas (a) through (f) represent a carbon C substituted with a group independently selected from R′, N or N-oxide; A of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group H, optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl, cycloalkyl, Cl and F; R of Formulas (a) through (f) comprises, but is not limited to: —CONR′R″, —OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —SO 2 R′, —SO 2 NR′ R″, —CR′ R″—, —CR′ NR′R″—, (—CR′O) n′ R″, -aryl, -hetaryl, -optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocyclyl, —P(O)(OR′)R″, —P(O)R′R″, —OP(O)(OR′)R″, —OP(O)R′R″, —Cl, —F, —Br, —I, —CF 3 , —CN, —NR′SO 2 NR′R″, —NR′CONR′R″, —CONR′COR″, —NR′C(═N—CN)NR′R″, —C(═N—CN)NR′R″, —NR′C(═N—CN)R″, —NR′C(═C—NO 2 )NR′R″, —SO 2 NR′COR″, —NO 2 , —CO 2 R′, —C(C═N—OR′)R″, —CR′═CR′R″, —CCR′, —S(C═O)(C═N—R′)R″, —SF 5 and —OCF 3 R′ and R″ of Formulas (a) through (f) are independently selected from a bond, H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, —C(═O)R, heterocyclyl, each of which is optionally substituted; n′ of Formulas (a) through (f) is an integer from 1-10 (e.g. 1-4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10); of Formulas (a) through (f) represents a bond that may be stereospecific ((R) or (S)) or non-stereospecific; and R n of Formulas (a) through (f) comprises from 1 to 4 independently selected functional groups or atoms, for example, O, OH, N, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, -alkyl-aryl (e.g., an -alkyl-aryl comprising at least one of C1-C6 alkyl, C4-C7 aryl, or a combination thereof), aryl (e.g., C5-C7 aryl), amine, amide, or carboxy.

Exemplary CLMs

In any of the compounds described herein, the CLM comprises a chemical structure selected from the group:

wherein:

W of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group CH 2 , CHR, C═O, SO 2 , NH, and N-alkyl; X of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group O, S and H 2 ; Y of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group CH 2 , —C═CR′, NH, N-alkyl, N-aryl, N-hetaryl, N-cycloalkyl, N-heterocyclyl, O, and S; Z of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group O, and S or H2 except that both X and Z cannot be H2; G and G′ of Formulas (a) through (f) are independently selected from the group H, optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl, OH, R′OCOOR, R′OCONRR″, CH 2 -heterocyclyl optionally substituted with R′, and benzyl optionally substituted with R′; Q1-Q4 of Formulas (a) through (f) represent a carbon C substituted with a group independently selected from R′, N or N-oxide; A of Formulas (a) through (f) is independently selected from the group H, alkyl (linear, branched, optionally substituted), cycloalkyl, Cl and F; R of Formulas (a) through (f) comprises, but is not limited to: —CONR′R″, —OR′, —NR′R″, —SR′, —SO 2 R′, —SO 2 NR′R″, —CR′R″—, —CR′NR′R″—, (—CR′O) n ′R″, -aryl, -hetaryl, -alkyl, -cycloalkyl, -heterocyclyl, —P(O)(OR′)R″, —P(O)R′R″, —OP(O)(OR′)R″, —OP(O)R′R″, —Cl, —F, —Br, —I, —CF3, —CN, —NR′SO2NR′R″, —NR′CONR′R″, —CONR′COR″, —NR′C(═N—CN)NR′R″, —C(═N—CN)NR′R″, —NR′C(═N—CN)R″, —NR′C(═C—NO2)NR′R″, —SO2NR′COR″, —NO2, —CO2R′, —C(C═N—OR′)R″, —CR′═CR′R″, —CCR′, —S(C═O)(C═N—R′)R″, —SF5 and —OCF3 R′ and R″ of Formulas (a) through (f) are independently selected from a bond, H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, —C(═O)R, heterocyclyl, each of which is optionally substituted; n of Formulas (a) through (f) is an integer from 1-10 (e.g., 1-4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10); of Formulas (a) through (f) represents a bond that may be stereospecific ((R) or (S)) or non-stereospecific; and Rn of Formulas (a) through (f) comprises from 1 to 4 independently selected functional groups or atoms, for example, O, OH, N, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, -alkyl-aryl (e.g., an -alkyl-aryl comprising at least one of C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 4 -C 7 aryl, or a combination thereof), aryl (e.g., C 5 -C 7 aryl), amine, amide, or carboxy, and optionally, one of which is modified to be covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, CLM (or CLM′) or combination thereof.

In certain embodiments described herein, the CLM or ULM comprises a chemical structure selected from the group:

wherein:

W of Formula (g) is independently selected from the group CH 2 , C═O, NH, and N-alkyl; R of Formula (g) is independently selected from a H, methyl, or optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl (e.g., optionally substituted linear or branched C1-C6 alkyl); of Formula (g) represents a bond that may be stereospecific ((R) or (S)) or non-stereospecific; and Rn of Formula (g) comprises from 1 to 4 independently selected functional groups or atoms, for example, O, OH, N, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, -alkyl-aryl (e.g., an -alkyl-aryl comprising at least one of C1-C6 alkyl, C4-C7 aryl, or a combination thereof), aryl (e.g., C5-C7 aryl), amine, amide, or carboxy, and optionally, one of which is modified to be covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, CLM (or CLM′) or combination thereof.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the W, X, Y, Z, G, G′, R, R′, R″, Q1-Q4, A, and Rn of Formulas (a) through (g) can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached one or more PTM, ULM, CLM or CLM′ groups.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, Rn comprises from 1 to 4 independently selected functional groups or atoms, for example, O, OH, N, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, -alkyl-aryl (e.g., an -alkyl-aryl comprising at least one of C1-C6 alkyl, C4-C7 aryl, or a combination thereof), aryl (e.g., C5-C7 aryl), amine, amide, or carboxy, and optionally, one of which is modified to be covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, CLM (or CLM′) or combination thereof.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, Rn comprises from 1 to 4 functional groups or atoms, for example, O, OH, N, C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, amine, amide, or carboxy, and optionally, one of which is modified to be covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, CLM (or CLM′) or combination thereof.

More specifically, non-limiting examples of CLMs include those shown below as well as those “hybrid” molecules that arise from the combination of 1 or more of the different features shown in the molecules below.

In any of the compounds described herein, the CLM comprises a chemical structure selected from the group:

wherein:

W is independently selected from CH 2 , CHR, C═O, SO 2 , NH, and N-alkyl; Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , Q 5 are each independently represent a carbon C or N substituted with a group independently selected from R′, N or N-oxide; R 1 is selected from absent, H, OH, CN, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, C═O; R 2 is selected from the group absent, H, OH, CN, C 1 -C 3 alkyl, CHF 2 , CF 3 , CHO, C(═O)NH 2 ; R 3 is selected from H, alkyl (e.g., C1-C6 or C1-C3 alkyl), substituted alkyl (e.g., substituted C1-C6 or C1-C3 alkyl), alkoxy (e.g., C1-C6 or C1-C3 alkoxyl), substituted alkoxy (e.g., substituted C1-C6 or C1-C3 alkoxyl); R 4 is selected from H, alkyl, substituted alkyl; R 5 and R 6 are each independently H, halogen, C(═O)R′, CN, OH, CF 3 ; X is C, CH, C═O, or N; X 1 is C═O, N, CH, or CH 2 ; R′ is selected from H, halogen, amine, alkyl (e.g., C1-C3 alkyl), substituted alkyl (e.g., substituted C1-C3 alkyl), alkoxy (e.g., C1-C3 alkoxyl), substituted alkoxy (e.g., substituted C1-C3 alkoxyl), NR 2 R 3 , C(═O)OR 2 , optionally substituted phenyl; n is 0-4; is a single or double bond; and the CLM is covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, CLM (or CLM′) or combination thereof.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the CLM or CLM′ is covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, a CLM, a CLM′, or a combination thereof via an R group (such as, R, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 or R′), W, X, or a Q group (such as, Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , or Q 5 ).

In any of the embodiments described herein, the CLM or CLM′ is covalently joined to a PTM, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, a CLM, a CLM′, or a combination thereof via W, X, R, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R′, Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , and Q 5 .

In any of the embodiments described herein, the W, X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R′, Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , and Q 5 can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached to one or more PTM, ULM, ULM′, CLM or CLM′ groups.

More specifically, non-limiting examples of CLMs include those shown below as well as “hybrid” molecules or compounds that arise from combining 1 or more features of the following compounds:

wherein:

W is independently selected from the group CH 2 , CHR, C═O, SO 2 , NH, and N-alkyl; R 1 is selected from the group absent, H, CH, CN, C 1 -C 3 alkyl; R 2 is H or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl; R 3 is selected from H, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy; R 4 is methyl or ethyl; R 5 is H or halo; R 6 is H or halo; R of the CLM is H; R′ is H or an attachment point for a PTM, a PTM′, a chemical linker group (L), a ULM, a CLM, a CLM′, Q 1 and Q 2 are each independently C or N substituted with a group independently selected from H or C1-C3 alkyl; is a single or double bond; and Rn comprises a functional group or an atom.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the W, R 1 , R 2 , Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , and Rn can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached one or more PTM, ULM, ULM′, CLM or CLM′ groups.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the R 1 , R 2 , Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , and Rn can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached one or more PTM, ULM, ULM′, CLM or CLM′ groups.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , Q 4 , and Rn can independently be covalently coupled to a linker and/or a linker to which is attached one or more PTM, ULM, ULM′, CLM or CLM′ groups.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, R n is modified to be covalently joined to the linker group (L), a PTM, a ULM, a second CLM having the same chemical structure as the CLM, a CLM′, a second linker, or any multiple or combination thereof.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the CLM is selected from:

wherein R′ is a halogen and R 1 is as described in any aspect or embodiment described herein.

In certain cases, “CLM” can be imides that bind to cereblon E3 ligase. These imides and linker attachment point can be, but not limited to, the following structures:

Exemplary VLMs

In certain embodiments of the compounds as described herein, ULM is VLM and comprises a chemical structure selected from the group ULM-a:

wherein:

a dashed line indicates the attachment of at least one PTM, another ULM or VLM or MLM or ILM or CLM (i.e., ULM′ or VLM′ or CLM′ or ILM′ or MLM′), or a chemical linker moiety coupling at least one PTM, a ULM′ or a VLM′ or a CLM′ or a ILM′ or a MLM′ to the other end of the linker; X 1 , X 2 of Formula ULM-a are each independently selected from the group of a bond, O, NR Y3 , CR Y3 R Y4 , C═O, C═S, SO, and SO 2 ; R Y3 , R Y4 of Formula ULM-a are each independently selected from the group of H, linear or branched C 1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted by 1 or more halo, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkoxyl (e.g., optionally substituted by 0-3 R P groups); R P of Formula ULM-a is 0, 1, 2, or 3 groups, each independently selected from the group H, halo, —OH, C 1-3 alkyl, C═O; W 3 of Formula ULM-a is selected from the group of an optionally substituted T, an optionally substituted -T-N(R 1a R 1b )X 3 , optionally substituted -T-N(R 1a R 1b ), optionally substituted -T-Aryl, an optionally substituted -T-Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted T-biheteroaryl, an optionally substituted -T-heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted -T-bi heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Aryl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Heteroaryl or an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Heterocycle; X 3 of Formula ULM-a is C═O, R 1 , R 1a , R 1b ; each of R 1 , R 1a , R 1b is independently selected from the group consisting of H, linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl group optionally substituted by 1 or more halo or —OH groups, R Y3 C═O, R Y3 C═S, R Y3 SO, R Y3 SO 2 , N(R Y3 R Y4 )C═O, N(R Y3 R Y4 )C═S, N(R Y3 R Y4 )SO, and N(R Y3 R Y4 )SO 2 ; T of Formula ULM-a is selected from the group of an optionally substituted alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n — group, wherein each one of the methylene groups is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group of halogen, methyl, a linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl group optionally substituted by 1 or more halogen, C(O)NR 1 R 1a , or NR 1 R 1a or R 1 and R 1a are joined to form an optionally substituted heterocyclyl, or —OH groups or an amino acid side chain optionally substituted; W 4 of Formula ULM-a is an optionally substituted —NR1-T-Aryl wherein the aryl group may be optionally substituted with an optionally substituted 5-6 membered heteroaryl, an optionally substituted —NR1-T-Heteroaryl group or an optionally substituted —NR1-T-Heterocycle, where —NR1 is covalently bonded to X 2 and R 1 is H or CH 3 , preferably H; and n is 0 to 6, often 0, 1, 2, or 3, preferably 0 or 1.

In any of the embodiments described herein, T is selected from the group of an optionally substituted alkyl, —(CH 2 ) n — group, wherein each one of the methylene groups is optionally substituted with one or two substituents selected from the group of halogen, methyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, a linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl group optionally substituted by 1 or more halogen, C(O) NR 1 R 1a , or NR 1 R 1a or R 1 and R 1a are joined to form an optionally substituted heterocycle, or —OH groups or an amino acid side chain optionally substituted; and n is 0 to 6, often 0, 1, 2, or 3, preferably 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, W 4 of Formula ULM-a is

wherein W 5 is an optionally substituted phenyl or an optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted with one or more [such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5] halo, CN, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted haloalkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, hydroxy, or optionally substituted haloalkoxy), and R 14a , R 14b , are each independently selected from the group of H, haloalkyl, or optionally substituted alkyl.

In any of the embodiments, W 5 of Formula ULM-a is selected from the group of an optionally substituted phenyl or an optionally substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl (e.g., W 5 is optionally substituted with one or more [such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5] halo, CN, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted haloalkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, hydroxy, or optionally substituted haloalkoxy), and

R 15 of Formula ULM-a is selected from the group of H, halogen, CN, OH, NO 2 , NR 14a R 14b , OR 14a , CONR 14a R 14b , NR 14a COR 14b , SO 2 NR 14a R 14b , NR 14a SO 2 R 14b , optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted haloalkyl, optionally substituted haloalkoxy, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted cycloheteroalkyl;

In additional embodiments, W 4 substituents for use in the present disclosure also include specifically (and without limitation to the specific compound disclosed) the W 4 substituents which are found in the identified compounds disclosed herein. Each of these W 4 substituents may be used in conjunction with any number of W 3 substituents which are also disclosed herein.

In certain additional embodiments, ULM-a, is optionally substituted by 0-3 R P groups in the pyrrolidine moiety. Each R P is independently H, halo, —OH, C1-3alkyl, C═O.

In any of the embodiments described herein, the W 3 , W 4 of Formula ULM-a can independently be covalently coupled to a linker which is attached one or more PTM groups.

and wherein the dashed line indicates the site of attachment of at least one PTM, another ULM (ULM′) or a chemical linker moiety coupling at least one PTM or a ULM′ or both to ULM.

In certain embodiments, ULM is VHL and is represented by the structure:

wherein:

W 3 of Formula ULM-b is selected from the group of an optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or

In certain embodiments, R 15 of Formula ULM-b is

wherein R 17 is H, halo, optionally substituted C 3-6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkyl, optionally substituted C 1-6 alkenyl, and C 1-6 haloalkyl; and Xa is S or O.

In certain embodiments, R 17 of Formula ULM-b is selected from the group methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, and cyclopropyl.

In certain additional embodiments, R 15 of Formula ULM-b is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, R 11 of Formula ULM-b is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, ULM has a chemical structure selected from the group of:

wherein:

R 1 of Formulas ULM-c, ULM-d, and ULM-e is H, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl; optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted hydroxyalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or haloalkyl; R 14a of Formulas ULM-c, ULM-d, and ULM-e is H, haloalkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, methyl, fluoromethyl, hydroxymethyl, ethyl, isopropyl, or cyclopropyl; R 15 of Formulas ULM-c, ULM-d, and ULM-e is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, CN, OH, NO 2 , optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryl; optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted haloalkyl, optionally substituted optionally substituted haloalkoxy, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, or optionally substituted cycloheteroalkyl; X of Formulas ULM-c, ULM-d, and ULM-e is C, CH 2 , or C═O R 3 of Formulas ULM-c, ULM-d, and ULM-e is absent or an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered heteroaryl; and the dashed line indicates the site of attachment of at least one PTM, another ULM (ULM′) or a chemical linker moiety coupling at least one PTM or a ULM′ or both to ULM.

In certain embodiments, ULM comprises a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

R 14a of Formula ULM-f is H, haloalkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, methyl, fluoromethyl, hydroxymethyl, ethyl, isopropyl, or cyclopropyl; R 9 of Formula ULM-f is H; R 10 of Formula ULM-f is H, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl;

R 11 of Formula ULM-f is

or optionally substituted heteroaryl;

p of Formula ULM-f is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4; each R 18 of Formula ULM-f is independently halo, optionally substituted alkoxy, cyano, optionally substituted alkyl, haloalkyl, haloalkoxy or a linker; R 12 of Formula ULM-f is H, C═O; R 13 of Formula ULM-f is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkylcarbonyl, optionally substituted (cycloalkyl)alkylcarbonyl, optionally substituted aralkylcarbonyl, optionally substituted arylcarbonyl, optionally substituted (heterocyclyl)carbonyl, or optionally substituted aralkyl, R 15 of Formula ULM-f is selected from the group consisting of H, halogen, Cl, CN, OH, NO 2 , optionally substituted haloalkyl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryl;

and

wherein the dashed line of Formula ULM-f indicates the site of attachment of at least one PTM, another ULM (ULM′) or a chemical linker moiety coupling at least one PTM or a ULM′ or both to ULM.

In certain embodiments, the ULM is selected from the following structures:

wherein n is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, the ULM is selected from the following structures:

wherein, the phenyl ring in ULM-a1 through ULM-a15, ULM-b1 through ULM-b12, ULM-c1 through ULM-c15 and ULM-d1 through ULM-d9 is optionally substituted with fluorine, lower alkyl and alkoxy groups, and wherein the dashed line indicates the site of attachment of at least one PTM, another ULM (ULM′) or a chemical linker moiety coupling at least one PTM or a ULM′ or both to ULM-a.

In one embodiment, the phenyl ring in ULM-a1 through ULM-a15, ULM-b1 through ULM-b12, ULM-c1 through ULM-c15 and ULM-d1 through ULM-d9 can be functionalized as the ester to make it a part of the prodrug.

In certain embodiments, the hydroxyl group on the pyrrolidine ring of ULM-a1 through ULM-a15, ULM-b1 through ULM-b12, ULM-c1 through ULM-c15 and ULM-d1 through ULM-d9, respectively, comprises an ester-linked prodrug moiety.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein:

R 1′ of ULM-g is an optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n OH, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n SH, an optionally substituted (CH 2 ) n —O—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl group, an optionally substituted (CH 2 ) n —WCOCW—(C 0 -C 6 )alkyl group containing an epoxide moiety WCOCW where each W is independently H or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n COOH, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n NHC(O)—R 1 , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—NR 1 R 2 , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n OC(O)—NR 1 R 2 , —(CH 2 O) n H, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n OC(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(CH 2 O) n COOH, an optionally substituted —(OCH 2 ) n O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(CH 2 O) n C(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(OCH 2 ) n NHC(O)—R 1 , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 O) n C(O)—NR 1 R 2 , —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n H, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n COOH, an optionally substituted —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n C(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n NHC(O)—R 1 , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n C(O)—NR 1 R 2 , an optionally substituted —SO 2 R S , an optionally substituted S(O)R S , NO 2 , CN or halogen (F, Cl, Br, I, preferably F or Cl); R 1 and R 2 of ULM-g are each independently H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group which may be optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen groups (preferably fluorine); R S of ULM-g is a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl, heteroaryl or heterocycle group or a —(CH 2 ) m NR 1 R 2 group; X and X′ of ULM-g are each independently C═O, C═S, —S(O), S(O) 2 , (preferably X and X′ are both C═O); R 2′ of ULM-g is an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w alkyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w NR 1N R 2N group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Aryl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) v NR 1 (SO 2 ) w -Heterocycle, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -alkyl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1N R 2N , an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1 C(O)R 1N , an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Aryl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n -Aryl-Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heteroaryl or an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) v NR 1 (SO 2 ) w -Heterocycle, an optionally substituted —X R2′ -alkyl group; an optionally substituted —X R2′ -Aryl group; an optionally substituted —X R2′ -Heteroaryl group; an optionally substituted —X R2′ -Heterocycle group; an optionally substituted; R 3′ of ULM-g is an optionally substituted alkyl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -alkyl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1N R 2N , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1 C(O)R 1N , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —C(O)NR 1 R 2 , an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Aryl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heterocycle, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -alkyl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1N R 2N , an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1 C(O)R 1N , an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Aryl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) n —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —(CH 2 ) m —C(O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heterocycle, an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -alkyl, an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1N R 2N , an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w —NR 1 C(O)R 1N , an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Aryl, an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heteroaryl or an optionally substituted —O—(CH 2 ) n —(C═O) u (NR 1 ) v (SO 2 ) w -Heterocycle; —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ -alkyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ -Aryl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ -Heteroaryl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ -Heterocycle′group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —N(R 1′ )(C═O) m′ —(V) n′ -alkyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —N(R 1′ )(C═O) m′ —(V) n′ -Aryl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —N(R 1′ )(C═O) m′ —(V) n′ -Heteroaryl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —N(R 1′ )(C═O) m′ —(V) n′ -Heterocycle group, an optionally substituted —X R3′ -alkyl group; an optionally substituted —X R3′ -Aryl group; an optionally substituted —X R3′ -Heteroaryl group; an optionally substituted —X R3′ -Heterocycle group; R 1N and R 2N of ULM-g are each independently H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups and up to three halogen groups or an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n -Aryl, —(CH 2 ) n -Heteroaryl or —(CH 2 ) n -Heterocycle group; V of ULM-g is O, S or NR 1 ; R 1 of ULM-g is the same as above; R 1 and R 1′ of ULM-g are each independently H or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group; X R2′ and X R3′ of ULM-g are each independently an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —, —(CH 2 ) n —CH(X v )═CH(X v )-(cis or trans), —(CH 2 ) n —CH≡CH—, —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n — or a C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl group, where X v is H, a halo or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group which is optionally substituted; each m of ULM-g is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; each m′ of ULM-g is independently 0 or 1; each n of ULM-g is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; each n′ of ULM-g is independently 0 or 1; each u of ULM-g is independently 0 or 1; each v of ULM-g is independently 0 or 1; each w of ULM-g is independently 0 or 1; and any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ , R 3′ , X and X′ of ULM-g is optionally modified to be covalently bonded to the PTM group through a linker group when PTM is not ULM′, or when PTM is ULM′, any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ , R 3′ , X and X′ of each of ULM and ULM′ are optionally modified to be covalently bonded to each other directly or through a linker group, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, solvate or polymorph thereof.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the ULM and when present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

each of R 1′ , R 2′ and R 3′ of ULM-h are the same as above and X is C═O, C═S, —S(O) group or a S(O) 2 group, more preferably a C═O group, and any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ and R 3′ of ULM-h are optionally modified to bind a linker group to which is further covalently bonded to the PTM group when PTM is not ULM′, or when PTM is ULM′, any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ , R 3′ of each of ULM and ULM′ are optionally modified to be covalently bonded to each other directly or through a linker group, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, diastereomer, solvate or polymorph thereof.

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the ULM, and when present, ULM′, are each independently according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ and R 3′ of ULM-I are optionally modified to bind a linker group to which is further covalently bonded to the PTM group when PTM is not ULM′, or when PTM is ULM′, any one or more of R 1′ , R 2′ , R 3′ of each of ULM and ULM′ are optionally modified to be covalently bonded to each other directly or through a linker group, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, diastereomer, solvate or polymorph thereof.

In further preferred aspects of the disclosure, R 1′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is preferably a hydroxyl group or a group which may be metabolized to a hydroxyl or carboxylic group, such that the compound represents a prodrug form of an active compound. Exemplary preferred R 1′ groups include, for example, —(CH 2 ) n OH, (CH 2 ) n —O—(C 1 -C 6 )alkyl group, —(CH 2 ) n COOH, —(CH 2 O) n H, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n OC(O)—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), or an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n C(O)—O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), wherein n is 0 or 1. Where R 1′ is or contains a carboxylic acid group, a hydroxyl group or an amine group, the hydroxyl group, carboxylic acid group or amine (each of which may be optionally substituted), may be further chemically modified to provide a covalent link to a linker group to which the PTM group (including a ULM′ group) is bonded;

X and X′, where present, of ULM-g and ULM-h are preferably a C═O, C═S, —S(O) group or a S(O) 2 group, more preferably a C═O group;

R 2′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is preferably an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Aryl (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-aryl or an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-aryl), an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Heteroaryl group (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-heteroaryl or an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-heteroaryl), or an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-heterocylcl (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-heterocylcl or an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-heterocylcl), where R 1 is H or CH 3 , preferably H and T is an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n — group, wherein each one of the methylene groups may be optionally substituted with one or two substituents, preferably selected from halogen, an amino acid sidechain as otherwise described herein or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably one or two methyl groups, which may be optionally substituted; and n is 0 to 6, often 0, 1, 2 or 3, preferably 0 or 1. Alternatively, T may also be a —(CH 2 O) n — group, a —(OCH 2 ) n — group, a —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n — group, a —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n — group, all of which groups are optionally substituted.

Preferred Aryl groups for R 2′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include optionally substituted phenyl or naphthyl groups, preferably phenyl groups, wherein the phenyl or naphthyl group is connected to a PTM (including a ULM′ group) with a linker group and/or optionally substituted with a halogen (preferably F or Cl), an amine, monoalkyl- or dialkyl amine (preferably, dimethylamine), F, Cl, OH, COOH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, preferably CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 , or CN group (each of which may be substituted in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), an optionally substituted phenyl group (the phenyl group itself is optionally connected to a PTM group, including a ULM′, with a linker group), and/or optionally substituted with at least one of F, Cl, OH, COOH, CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 , or CN group (in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), a naphthyl group, which may be optionally substituted, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, preferably an optionally substituted isoxazole including a methylsubstituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted oxazole including a methylsubstituted oxazole, an optionally substituted thiazole including a methyl substituted thiazole, an optionally substituted isothiazole including a methyl substituted isothiazole, an optionally substituted pyrrole including a methylsubstituted pyrrole, an optionally substituted imidazole including a methylimidazole, an optionally substituted benzimidazole or methoxybenzylimidazole, an optionally substituted oximidazole or methyloximidazole, an optionally substituted diazole group, including a methyldiazole group, an optionally substituted triazole group, including a methylsubstituted triazole group, an optionally substituted pyridine group, including a halo- (preferably, F) or methylsubstitutedpyridine group or an oxapyridine group (where the pyridine group is linked to the phenyl group by an oxygen), an optionally substituted furan, an optionally substituted benzofuran, an optionally substituted dihydrobenzofuran, an optionally substituted indole, indolizine or azaindolizine (2, 3, or 4-azaindolizine), an optionally substituted quinoline, an optionally substituted group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

S c of ULM-g through ULM-i is CHR SS , NR URE , or O; R HET of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl); R SS of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably F or Cl), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups), optionally substituted O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups); R URE of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, a C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl) or a —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) each of which groups is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen, preferably fluorine groups, or an optionally substituted phenyl group, an optionally substituted heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted heterocycle, preferably for example piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran); R PRO of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl or an optionally substituted aryl (phenyl or napthyl), heteroaryl or heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, diazole, oximidazole, pyrrole, pyrollidine, furan, dihydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, thiene, dihydrothiene, tetrahydrothiene, pyridine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, quinoline, (each preferably substituted with a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably methyl or a halo group, preferably F or Cl), benzofuran, indole, indolizine, azaindolizine; R PRO1 and R PRO2 of ULM-g through ULM-i are each independently H, an optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl group or together form a keto group; and each n of ULM-g through ULM-i is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 (preferably 0 or 1), or an optionally substituted heterocycle, preferably tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiene, piperidine, piperazine or morpholine (each of which groups when substituted, are preferably substituted with a methyl or halo (F, Br, Cl), each of which groups may be optionally attached to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

In certain preferred aspects,

of ULM-g through ULM-i is a

group,

where R PRO and n of ULM-g through ULM-i are the same as above.

Preferred heteroaryl groups for R 2′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include an optionally substituted quinoline (which may be attached to the pharmacophore or substituted on any carbon atom within the quinoline ring), an optionally substituted indole, an optionally substituted indolizine, an optionally substituted azaindolizine, an optionally substituted benzofuran, including an optionally substituted benzofuran, an optionally substituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted thiazole, an optionally substituted isothiazole, an optionally substituted thiophene, an optionally substituted pyridine (2-, 3, or 4-pyridine), an optionally substituted imidazole, an optionally substituted pyrrole, an optionally substituted diazole, an optionally substituted triazole, a tetrazole, an optionally substituted oximidazole, or a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

S c of ULM-g through ULM-i is CHR SS , NR URE , or O; R HET of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a of ULM-g through ULM-i is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl); R SS of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably F or Cl), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups), optionally substituted O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups); R URE of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, a C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl) or a —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), each of which groups is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen, preferably fluorine groups, or an optionally substituted heterocycle, for example piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, piperidine, piperazine, each of which is optionally substituted, and Y C of ULM-g through ULM-i is N or C—R YC , where R YC is H, OH, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl), each of which groups may be optionally connected to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

Preferred heterocylclgroups for R 2′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiene, tetrahydroquinoline, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrollidine, morpholine, oxane or thiane, each of which groups may be optionally substituted, or a group according to the chemical structure:

preferably, a

group,

wherein:

R PRO of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl or an optionally substituted aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclyl group; R PRO1 and R PRO2 of ULM-g through ULM-i are each independently H, an optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl group or together form a keto group and each n of ULM-g through ULM-i is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 (often 0 or 1), each of which groups may be optionally connected to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

Preferred R 2′ substituents of ULM-g through ULM-i also include specifically (and without limitation to the specific compound disclosed) the R 2′ substituents which are found in the identified compounds disclosed herein (which includes the specific compounds which are disclosed in the present specification, and the figures which are attached hereto). Each of these R 2′ substituents may be used in conjunction with any number of R 3′ substituents which are also disclosed herein.

R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is preferably an optionally substituted -T-Aryl, an optionally substituted-T-Heteroaryl, an optionally substituted -T-heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Aryl (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-aryl, an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-aryl, or or an optionally substituted N(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-T-aryl), an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-Heteroaryl (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-heteroaryl, an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-heteroaryl, or an optionally substituted N(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-T-heteroaryl), or an optionally substituted —NR 1 -T-heterocyclyl (e.g., an optionally substituted NH-T-heterocyclyl, an optionally substituted N(CH 3 )-T-heterocyclyl, or or an optionally substituted N(C 1 -C 3 alkyl)-T-heterocyclyl), where R 1 is H or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably H or CH 3 , T is an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m — group, wherein each one of the methylene groups may be optionally substituted with one or two substituents, preferably selected from halogen, a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group or the sidechain of an amino acid as otherwise described herein, preferably methyl, which may be optionally substituted; and n is 0 to 6, often 0, 1, 2, or 3 preferably 0 or 1. Alternatively, T may also be a —(CH 2 O) n — group, a —(OCH 2 ) n — group, a —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n — group, a —(OCH 2 CH 2 ) n — group, each of which groups is optionally substituted.

Preferred aryl groups for R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include optionally substituted phenyl or naphthyl groups, preferably phenyl groups, wherein the phenyl or naphthyl group is optionally connected to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group and/or optionally substituted with a halogen (preferably F or Cl), an amine, monoalkyl- or dialkyl amine (preferably, dimethylamine), an amido group (preferably a —(CH 2 ) m —NR 1 C(O)R 2 group where m, R 1 and R 2 are the same as above), a halo (often F or Cl), OH, CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 —CN or a S(O) 2 R S group (R S is a a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group, an optionally substituted aryl, heteroaryl or heterocycle group or a —(CH 2 ) m NR 1 R 2 group), each of which may be substituted in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), or an Aryl (preferably phenyl), Heteroaryl or Heterocycle. Preferably said substituent phenyl group is an optionally substituted phenyl group (i.e., the substituent phenyl group itself is preferably substituted with at least one of F, Cl, OH, SH, COOH, CH 3 , CF 3 , OMe, OCF 3 , NO 2 , CN or a linker group to which is attached a PTM group (including a ULM′ group), wherein the substitution occurs in ortho-, meta- and/or para-positions of the phenyl ring, preferably para-), a naphthyl group, which may be optionally substituted including as described above, an optionally substituted heteroaryl (preferably an optionally substituted isoxazole including a methylsubstituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted oxazole including a methylsubstituted oxazole, an optionally substituted thiazole including a methyl substituted thiazole, an optionally substituted pyrrole including a methylsubstituted pyrrole, an optionally substituted imidazole including a methylimidazole, a benzylimidazole or methoxybenzylimidazole, an oximidazole or methyloximidazole, an optionally substituted diazole group, including a methyldiazole group, an optionally substituted triazole group, including a methylsubstituted triazole group, a pyridine group, including a halo-(preferably, F) or methylsubstitutedpyridine group or an oxapyridine group (where the pyridine group is linked to the phenyl group by an oxygen) or an optionally substituted heterocycle (tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, pyrrolidine, piperidine, morpholine, piperazine, tetrahydroquinoline, oxane or thiane. Each of the aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic groups may be optionally connected to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

Preferred Heteroaryl groups for R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include an optionally substituted quinoline (which may be attached to the pharmacophore or substituted on any carbon atom within the quinoline ring), an optionally substituted indole (including dihydroindole), an optionally substituted indolizine, an optionally substituted azaindolizine (2, 3 or 4-azaindolizine) an optionally substituted benzimidazole, benzodiazole, benzoxofuran, an optionally substituted imidazole, an optionally substituted isoxazole, an optionally substituted oxazole (preferably methyl substituted), an optionally substituted diazole, an optionally substituted triazole, a tetrazole, an optionally substituted benzofuran, an optionally substituted thiophene, an optionally substituted thiazole (preferably methyl and/or thiol substituted), an optionally substituted isothiazole, an optionally substituted triazole (preferably a 1,2,3-triazole substituted with a methyl group, a triisopropylsilyl group, an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m —O—C 1 -C 6 alkyl group or an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) m —C(O)—O—C 1 -C 6 alkyl group), an optionally substituted pyridine (2-, 3, or 4-pyridine) or a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

S c of ULM-g through ULM-i is CHR SS , NR URE , or O; R HET of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl); R SS of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably F or Cl), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups), optionally substituted O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups); R URE of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, a C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl) or a —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl), each of which groups is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen, preferably fluorine groups, or an optionally substituted heterocycle, for example piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, piperidine, piperazine, each of which is optionally substituted, and Y C of ULM-g through ULM-i is N or C—R YC , where R YC is H, OH, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl). Each of said heteroaryl groups may be optionally connected/attached to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

Preferred heterocycle groups for R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i include tetrahydroquinoline, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrollidine, morpholine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, oxane and thiane, each of which groups may be optionally substituted or a group according to the chemical structure:

preferably, a

group,

wherein:

R PRO of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl or an optionally substituted aryl (phenyl or napthyl), heteroaryl or heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, diazole, oximidazole, pyrrole, pyrollidine, furan, dihydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, thiene, dihydrothiene, tetrahydrothiene, pyridine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, quinoline, (each preferably substituted with a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably methyl or a halo group, preferably F or Cl), benzofuran, indole, indolizine, azaindolizine; R PRO1 and R PRO2 of ULM-g through ULM-i are each independently H, an optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl group or together form a keto group, and each n of ULM-g through ULM-i is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 (preferably 0 or 1), wherein each of said Heteocycle groups may be optionally connected/attached to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

Preferred R 3′ substituents of ULM-g through ULM-i also include specifically (and without limitation to the specific compound disclosed) the R 3′ substituents which are found in the identified compounds disclosed herein (which includes the specific compounds which are disclosed in the present specification, and the figures which are attached hereto). Each of these R 3′ substituents may be used in conjunction with any number of R 2′ substituents, which are also disclosed herein.

In certain alternative preferred embodiments, R 2′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is an optionally substituted —NR 1 —X R2′ -alkyl group, —NR 1 —X R2′ -Aryl group; an optionally substituted —NR 1 —X R2′ -HET, an optionally substituted —NR 1 —X R2′ -Aryl-HET or an optionally substituted —NR 1 —X R2′ -HET-Aryl,

wherein:

Each of said groups may be optionally connected/attached to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

In certain alternative preferred embodiments of the present disclosure, R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is an optionally substituted —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —(CH 2 ) n —(V) n′ —R S3′ group, an optionally substituted-(CH 2 ) n —N(R 1′ )(C═O) m′ —(V) n′ —R S3′ group, an optionally substituted —X R3′ -alkyl group, an optionally substituted —X R3′ -Aryl group; an optionally substituted —X R3′ -HET group, an optionally substituted —X R3′ -Aryl-HET group or an optionally substituted —X R3′ -HET-Aryl group, wherein:

R S3′ is an optionally substituted alkyl group (C 1 -C 10 , preferably C 1 -C 6 alkyl), an optionally substituted Aryl group or a HET group; R 1′ is H or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group (preferably H); V is O, S or NR 1′ ; X R3′ is —(CH 2 ) n —, —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n —, —CH 2 ) n —CH(X v )═CH(X v )-(cis or trans), —CH 2 ) n —CH≡CH—, or a C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl group, all optionally substituted; X v is H, a halo or a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group which is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen groups; Alkyl is an optionally substituted C 1 -C 10 alkyl (preferably a C 1 -C 6 alkyl) group (in certain preferred embodiments, the alkyl group is end-capped with a halo group, often a Cl or Br); Aryl is an optionally substituted phenyl or napthyl group (preferably, a phenyl group); and HET is an optionally substituted oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, diazole, oximidazole, pyrrole, pyrollidine, furan, dihydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, thiene, dihydrothiene, tetrahydrothiene, pyridine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, benzofuran, indole, indolizine, azaindolizine, quinoline (when substituted, each preferably substituted with a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably methyl or a halo group, preferably F or Cl), or a group according to the chemical structure:

S c of ULM-g through ULM-i is CHR SS , NR URE , or O;

R HET of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl);

R SS of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably F or Cl), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups), optionally substituted O—(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted —C(O)(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups);

R URE of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, a C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably H or C 1 -C 3 alkyl) or a —C(O)(C 0 -C 6 alkyl), each of which groups is optionally substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halogen, preferably fluorine groups, or an optionally substituted heterocycle, for example piperidine, morpholine, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene, piperidine, piperazine, each of which is optionally substituted;

Y C of ULM-g through ULM-i is N or C—R YC , where R YC is H, OH, CN, NO 2 , halo (preferably Cl or F), optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups (e.g. CF 3 ), optionally substituted O(C 1 -C 6 alkyl) (preferably substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or up to three halo groups) or an optionally substituted acetylenic group —C≡C—R a where R a is H or a C 1 -C 6 alkyl group (preferably C 1 -C 3 alkyl);

R PRO of ULM-g through ULM-i is H, optionally substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl or an optionally substituted aryl (phenyl or napthyl), heteroaryl or heterocyclic group selected from the group consisting of oxazole, isoxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, diazole, oximidazole, pyrrole, pyrollidine, furan, dihydrofuran, tetrahydrofuran, thiene, dihydrothiene, tetrahydrothiene, pyridine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, quinoline, (each preferably substituted with a C 1 -C 3 alkyl group, preferably methyl or a halo group, preferably F or Cl), benzofuran, indole, indolizine, azaindolizine;

R PRO1 and R PRO2 of ULM-g through ULM-i are each independently H, an optionally substituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl group or together form a keto group;

each n of ULM-g through ULM-i is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 (preferably 0 or 1);

each m′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is 0 or 1; and

each n′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is 0 or 1;

wherein each of said compounds, preferably on the alkyl, Aryl or Het groups, is optionally connected/attached to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker.

In alternative embodiments, R 3′ of ULM-g through ULM-i is —(CH 2 ) n -Aryl, —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -Aryl, —(CH 2 ) n -HET or —(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -HET,

wherein:

In still additional embodiments, preferred compounds include those according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

R 1′ of ULM-i is OH or a group which is metabolized in a patient or subject to OH; R 2′ of ULM-i is a —NH—CH 2 -Aryl-HET (preferably, a phenyl linked directly to a methyl substituted thiazole); R 3′ of ULM-i is a —CHR CR3′ —NH—C(O)—R 3P1 group or a —CHR cr3′ -R 3P2 group; R CR3 ′ of ULM-i is a C 1 -C 4 alkyl group, preferably methyl, isopropyl or tert-butyl; R 3P1 of ULM-i is C 1 -C 3 alkyl (preferably methyl), an optionally substituted oxetane group (preferably methyl substituted, a —(CH 2 ) n OOH 3 group where n is 1 or 2 (preferably 2), or a

group (the ethyl ether group is preferably meta-substituted on the phenyl moiety), a morpholino group (linked to the carbonyl at the 2- or 3-position;

R 3P2 of ULM-i is a

group;

Aryl of ULM-i is phenyl; HET of ULM-i is an optionally substituted thiazole or isothiazole; and R HET of ULM-i is H or a halo group (preferably H); or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, stereoisomer, solvate or polymorph thereof, wherein each of said compounds is optionally connected to a PTM group (including a ULM′ group) via a linker group.

In certain aspects, bifunctional compounds comprising a ubiquitin E3 ligase binding moiety (ULM), wherein ULM is a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

each R 5 and R 6 of ULM-j is independently OH, SH, or optionally substituted alkyl or R 5 , R 6 , and the carbon atom to which they are attached form a carbonyl; R 7 of ULM-j is H or optionally substituted alkyl; E of ULM-j is a bond, C═O, or C═S; G of ULM-j is a bond, optionally substituted alkyl, —COOH or C=J; J of ULM-j is O or N—R 8 ; R 8 of ULM-j is H, CN, optionally substituted alkyl or optionally substituted alkoxy; M of ULM-j is optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted heterocyclic or

In certain embodiments, wherein G of ULM-j is C=J, J is O, R 7 is H, each R 14 is H, and o is 0.

In certain embodiments, wherein G of ULM-j is C=J, J is O, R 7 is H, each R 14 is H, R 15 is optionally substituted heteroaryl, and o is 0. In other instances, E is C═O and M is

In certain embodiments, wherein E of ULM-j is C═O, R 11 is optionally substituted heterocyclic or

and M is

In certain embodiments, wherein E of ULM-j is C═O, M is

and R 11 is

each R 18 is independently halo, optionally substituted alkoxy, cyano, optionally substituted alkyl, haloalkyl, or haloalkoxy; and p is 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

In certain embodiments, ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

G of ULM-k is C=J, J is O; R 7 of ULM-k is H; each R 14 of ULM-k is H; o of ULM-k is 0; R 15 of ULM-k is

and

R 17 of ULM-k is H, halo, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, and haloalkyl.

In other instances, R 17 of ULM-k is alkyl (e.g., methyl) or cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl).

In other embodiments, ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

G of ULM-k is C=J, J is O; R 7 of ULM-k is H; each R 14 of ULM-k is H; o of ULM-k is 0; and R 15 of ULM-k is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein

R 30 of ULM-k is H or an optionally substituted alkyl.

In other embodiments, ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

E of ULM-k is C═O; M of ULM-k is

and

R 11 of ULM-k is selected from the group consisting of:

In still other embodiments, a compound of the chemical structure,

wherein E of ULM-k is C═O:

R 11 of ULM-k is

and

M of ULM-k is

q of ULM-k is 1 or 2;

R 20 of ULM-k is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or

R 21 of ULM-k is H or optionally substituted alkyl; and

R 22 of ULM-k is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, or haloalkyl.

In any embodiment described herein, R 11 of ULM-j or ULM-k is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, R 11 of ULM-j or ULM-k is selected from the group consisting of:

In certain embodiments, ULM (or when present ULM′) is a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

X of ULM-1 is O or S; Y of ULM-1 is H, methyl or ethyl; R 17 of ULM-1 is H, methyl, ethyl, hydoxymethyl or cyclopropyl; M of ULM-1 is is optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, or

In some embodiments, ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

Y of ULM-m is H, methyl or ethyl R 9 of ULM-m is H; R 10 is isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl; R 11 of ULM-m is optionally substituted amide, optionally substituted isoindolinone, optionally substituted isooxazole, optionally substituted heterocycles.

In other preferred embodiments of the disclosure, ULM and where present, ULM′, are each independently a group according to the chemical structure:

wherein:

R 17 of ULM-n is methyl, ethyl, or cyclopropyl; and R 9 , R 10 , and R 11 of ULM-n are as defined above. In other instances, R 9 is H; and R 10 of ULM-n is H, alkyl, or or cycloalkyl (preferably, isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, cyclopentyl, or cyclohexyl).

In any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the ULM (or when present, ULM′) as described herein may be a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, diastereomer, solvate or polymorph thereof. In addition, in any of the aspects or embodiments described herein, the ULM (or when present, ULM′) as described herein may be coupled to a PTM directly via a bond or by a chemical linker.

In certain aspects of the disclosure, the ULM moiety is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein the VLM may be connected to a PTM via a linker, as described herein, at any appropriate location, including, e.g., an aryl, heteroary, phenyl, or phenyl of an indole group, optionally via any appropriate functional group, such as an amine, ester, ether, alkyl, or alkoxy.

Exemplary Linkers

In certain embodiments, the compounds as described herein include one or more PTMs chemically linked or coupled to one or more ULMs (e.g., at least one of CLM, VLM, MLM, ILM, or a combination thereof) via a chemical linker (L). In certain embodiments, the linker group L is a group comprising one or more covalently connected structural units (e.g., -A L 1 . . . (A L ) q - or -(A L ) q -), wherein A L 1 is a group coupled to PTM, and (A L ) q is a group coupled to ULM.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the linker group L is a bond or a chemical linker group represented by the formula -(A L ) q -, wherein A L is a chemical moiety and q is an integer from 1-100, and wherein A L is covalently bound to the PTM and the ULM, and provides for sufficient binding of the PTM to the protein target and the ULM to an E3 ubiquitin ligase to result in target protein ubiquitination.

In certain embodiments, the linker group L is -(A L ) q -, wherein:

(A L ) q is a group which is connected to at least one of a ULM (such as a CLM or a VLM), PTM moiety, or a combination thereof; q of the linker is an integer greater than or equal to 1; each A L is independently selected from the group consisting of, a bond, CR L1 R L2 , S, SO, SO 2 , NR L3 , SO 2 NR L3 , SONR L3 , CONR L3 , NR L3 CONR L4 , NR L3 SO 2 NR L4 , CO, CR L1 ═CR L2 , C≡C, SiR L1 R L2 , P(O)R L1 , P(O)OR L1 , NR L3 C(═NCN)NR L4 , NR L3 C(═NCN), NR L3 C(═CNO 2 )NR L4 , C 3-11 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with 0-6 R L1 and/or R L2 groups, C 5 -13 spirocycloalkyl optionally substituted with 0-9 R L1 and/or R L2 groups, C 3-11 heterocyclyl optionally substituted with 0-6 R L1 and/or R L2 groups, C 5-13 spiroheterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with 0-8R L1 and/or R L2 groups, aryl optionally substituted with 0-6 R L1 and/or R L2 groups, heteroaryl optionally substituted with 0-6 R L1 and/or R L2 groups, where R L1 or R L2 , each independently are optionally linked to other groups to form cycloalkyl and/or heterocyclyl moiety, optionally substituted with 0-4 R L5 groups; and R L1 , R L2 , R L3 , R L4 and R L5 are, each independently, H, halo, C 1-8 alkyl, OC 1-8 alkyl, SC 1-8 alkyl, NHC 1-8 alkyl, N(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , C 3-11 cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C 3-11 heterocyclyl, OC 1-8 cycloalkyl, SC 1-8 cycloalkyl, NHC 1-8 cycloalkyl, N(C 1-8 cycloalkyl) 2 , N(C 1-8 cycloalkyl)(C 1-8 alkyl), OH, NH 2 , SH, SO 2 C 1-8 alkyl, P(O)(OC 1-8 alkyl)(C 1-8 alkyl), P(O)(OC 1-8 alkyl) 2 , C≡C—C 1-8 alkyl, CCH, CH═CH(C 1-8 alkyl), C(C 1-8 alkyl)═CH(C 1-8 alkyl), C(C 1-8 alkyl)═C(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , Si(OH) 3 , Si(C 1-8 alkyl) 3 , Si(OH)(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , COC 1-8 alkyl, CO 2 H, halogen, CN, CF 3 , CHF 2 , CH 2 F, NO 2 , SF 5 , SO 2 NHC 1-8 alkyl, SO 2 N(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , SONHC 1-8 alkyl, SON(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , CONHC 1-8 alkyl, CON(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , N(C 1-8 alkyl)CONH(C 1-8 alkyl), N(C 1-8 alkyl)CON(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , NHCONH(C 1-8 alkyl), NHCON(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , NHCONH 2 , N(C 1-8 alkyl)SO 2 NH(C 1-8 alkyl), N(C 1-8 alkyl) SO 2 N(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , NH SO 2 NH(C 1-8 alkyl), NH SO 2 N(C 1-8 alkyl) 2 , NH SO 2 NH 2 .

In certain embodiments, q of the linker is an integer greater than or equal to 0. In certain embodiments, q is an integer greater than or equal to 1.

In certain embodiments, e.g., where q of the linker is greater than 2, (A L ) q is a group which is connected to ULM, and A L 1 and (A L ) q are connected via structural units of the linker (L).

In certain embodiments, e.g., where q of the linker is 2, (A L ) q is a group which is connected to A L 1 and to a ULM.

In certain embodiments, e.g., where q of the linker is 1, the structure of the linker group L is -A L 1 -, and A L 1 is a group which is connected to a ULM moiety and a PTM moiety.

In certain embodiments, the unit A L of linker (L) comprises a group represented by a general structure selected from the group consisting of:

—NR(CH 2 ) n -(lower alkyl)-, —NR(CH 2 ) n -(lower alkoxyl)-, —NR(CH 2 ) n -(lower alkoxyl)-OCH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 ) n -(lower alkoxyl)-(lower alkyl)-OCH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 ) n -(cycloalkyl)-(lower alkyl)-OCH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 ) n -(hetero cycloalkyl)-, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(lower alkyl)-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(hetero cycloalkyl)-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -Aryl-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(heteroaryl)-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(cyclo alkyl)-O-(heteroaryl)-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(cyclo alkyl)-O-Aryl-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(lower alkyl)-NH-Aryl-O—CH 2 —, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -(lower alkyl)-O-Aryl-CH 2 , —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -cycloalkyl-O-Aryl-, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 O) n -cycloalkyl-O-(heteroaryl)l-, —NR(CH 2 CH 2 ) n -(cycloalkyl)-O-(heterocyclyl)-CH 2 , —NR(CH 2 CH 2 ) n -(heterocyclyl)-(heterocyclyl)-CH 2 , —N(R 1 R 2 )-(heterocyclyl)-CH 2 ; where n of the linker can be 0 to 10; R of the linker can be H, lower alkyl; R1 and R2 of the linker can form a ring with the connecting N.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the unit A L of linker (L) comprises a group selected from:

wherein:

*N of the heterocycloalkyl is shared with the PTM; and each m, n, o, p, q, r, and s are independently selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20.

In certain embodiments, the unit A L of linker (L) comprises a group represented by a general structure selected from the group consisting of:

—N(R)—(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r -OCH2-, —O—(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r -OCH2-, —O—(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r —O—; —N(R)—(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r —O—; —(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r —O—; —(CH2) m —O(CH2) n —O(CH2) o —O(CH2) p —O(CH2) q —O(CH2) r -OCH2-;

wherein

m, n, o, p, q, and r of the linker are independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20; when the number is zero, there is no N—O or O—O bond R of the linker is H, methyl and ethyl; X of the linker is H and F

where m of the linker can be 2, 3, 4, 5

where each n and m of the linker can independently be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the unit A L of linker (L) is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein each m and n is independently selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the unit A L of linker (L) is selected from the group consisting of:

wherein each m, n, o, p, q, r, and s is independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the unit A L of linker (L) is selected from the group consisting of:

In additional embodiments, the linker (L) comprises a structure selected from, but not limited to the structure shown below, where a dashed line indicates the attachment point to the PTM or ULM moieties:

wherein:

W L1 and W L2 are each independently absent, a 4-8 membered ring with 0-4 heteroatoms, optionally substituted with R Q , each R Q is independently a H, halo, OH, CN, CF 3 , optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, or 2 R Q groups taken together with the atom they are attached to, form a 4-8 membered ring system containing 0-4 heteroatoms; Y L1 is each independently a bond, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl, and optionally one or more C atoms are replaced with O; or optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkoxy; n and m are independently 0-10; and

indicates the attachment point to the PTM or ULM moieties.

In additional embodiments, the linker (L) comprises a structure selected from, but not limited to the structure shown below, where a dashed line indicates the attachment point to the PTM or ULM moieties:

wherein:

W L1 and W L2 are each independently absent, aryl, heteroaryl, cyclic, heterocyclic, C 1-6 alkyl and optionally one or more C atoms are replaced with O or N, C 1-6 alkene and optionally one or more C atoms are replaced with O, C 1-6 alkyne and optionally one or more C atoms are replaced with O, bicyclic, biaryl, biheteroaryl, or biheterocyclic, each optionally substituted with R Q , each R Q is independently a H, halo, OH, CN, CF 3 , hydroxyl, nitro, C≡CH, C 2-6 alkenyl, C 2-6 alkynyl, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, optionally substituted OC 1-3 alkyl (e.g., optionally substituted by 1 or more —F), OH, NH 2 , NR Y1 R Y2 , CN, or 2 R Q groups taken together with the atom they are attached to, form a 4-8 membered ring system containing 0-4 heteroatoms; Y L1 is each independently a bond, NR YL1 , O, S, NR YL2 , CR YL1 R YL2 , C═O, C═S, SO, SO 2 , C 1 -C 6 alkyl (linear, branched, optionally substituted) and optionally one or more C atoms are replaced with O; optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, 3-6 membered alicyclic or aromatic ring with 0-4 heteroatoms; Q L is a 3-6 membered alicyclic or aromatic ring with 0-4 heteroatoms, optionally bridged, optionally substituted with 0-6 R Q , each R Q is independently H, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., optionally substituted by 1 or more halo or C1-6 alkoxyl), or 2 R Q groups taken together with the atom they are attached to, form a 3-8 membered ring system containing 0-2 heteroatoms; R YL1 , R YL2 are each independently H, OH, optionally substituted linear or branched C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., optionally substituted by 1 or more halo or C 1-6 alkoxyl), or R 1 , R 2 together with the atom they are attached to, form a 3-8 membered ring system containing 0-2 heteroatoms; n and m are independently 0-10; and

indicates the attachment point to the PTM or ULM moieties.

In additional embodiments, the linker group is optionally substituted (poly)ethyleneglycol having between 1 and about 100 ethylene glycol units (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, etc., ethylene glycol units), between about 1 and about 50 ethylene glycol units, between 1 and about 25 ethylene glycol units, between about 1 and 10 ethylene glycol units, between 1 and about 8 ethylene glycol units and 1 and 6 ethylene glycol units, between 2 and 4 ethylene glycol units, or optionally substituted alkyl groups interdispersed with optionally substituted, O, N, S, P or Si atoms. In certain embodiments, the linker is substituted with an aryl, phenyl, benzyl, alkyl, alkylene, or heterocycle group. In certain embodiments, the linker may be asymmetric or symmetrical.

In any of the embodiments of the compounds described herein, the linker group may be any suitable moiety as described herein. In one embodiment, the linker is a substituted or unsubstituted polyethylene glycol group ranging in size from about 1 to about 12 ethylene glycol units, between 1 and about 10 ethylene glycol units, about 2 about 6 ethylene glycol units, between about 2 and 5 ethylene glycol units, between about 2 and 4 ethylene glycol units.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the linker (L) includes an optionally substituted C 1 -C 50 alkyl (e.g., C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , C 4 , C 5 , C 6 , C 7 , C 8 , C 9 , C 10 , C 11 , C 12 , C 13 , C 14 , C 15 , C 16 , C 17 , C 18 , C 19 , C 20 , C 21 , C 22 , C 23 , C 24 , C 25 , C 26 , C 27 , C 28 , C 29 , C 30 , C 31 , C 32 , C 33 , C 34 , C 35 , C 36 , C 37 , C 38 , C 39 , C 40 , C 41 , C 42 , C 43 , C 44 , C 45 , C 46 , C 47 , C 48 , C 49 , or C 50 alkyl), wherein each carbon is optionally substituted with a heteroatom selected from N, S, P, or Si atoms that has an appropriate number of hydrogens, substitutions, or both to complete valency, with the proviso that there is no heteroatom-heteroatom bonding (e.g., no heteroatoms are covalently linked or adjacently located).

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the linker (L) includes about 1 to about 50 (e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, or 50) alkylene glycol units that are optionally substituted, wherein carbon or oxygen may be substituted with a heteroatom selected from N, S, P, or Si atoms with an appropriate number of hydrogens to complete valency. For example, in any aspect or embodiment described herein, the linker (L) has a chemical structure selected from:

wherein carbon or oxygen may be substituted with a heteroatom selected from N, S, P, or Si atoms with an appropriate number of hydrogens to complete valency, and m, n, o, p, q, r, and s are independently selected from 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, and 20.

In another embodiment, the present disclosure is directed to a compound which comprises a PTM group as described above, which binds to a target protein or polypeptide (e.g., Kirsten rat sarcoma protein (KRas or KRAS) and/or a gain-of-function KRas mutant), which is ubiquitinated by an ubiquitin ligase and is chemically linked directly to the ULM group or through a linker moiety L, or PTM is alternatively a ULM′ group which is also a ubiquitin ligase binding moiety, which may be the same or different than the ULM group as described above and is linked directly to the ULM group directly or through the linker moiety; and L is a linker moiety as described above which may be present or absent and which chemically (covalently) links ULM to PTM, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, enantiomer, stereoisomer, solvate or polymorph thereof.

In certain embodiments, the linker group L is a group comprising one or more covalently connected structural units independently selected from the group consisting of:

The X is selected from the group consisting of O, N, S, S(O) and SO 2 ; n is integer from 1 to 5;

R L1 is hydrogen or alkyl,

is a mono- or bicyclic aryl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents selected from alkyl, halogen, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy or cyano;

is a mono- or bicyclic cycloalkyl or a heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents selected from alkyl, halogen, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy or cyano; and the phenyl ring fragment can be optionally substituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, halogen, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy and cyano. In an embodiment, the linker group L comprises up to 10 covalently connected structural units, as described above.

Although the ULM group and PTM group may be covalently linked to the linker group through any group which is appropriate and stable to the chemistry of the linker, in preferred aspects of the present disclosure, the linker is independently covalently bonded to the ULM group and the PTM group preferably through an amide, ester, thioester, keto group, carbamate (urethane), carbon or ether, each of which groups may be inserted anywhere on the ULM group and PTM group to provide maximum binding of the ULM group on the ubiquitin ligase and the PTM group on the target protein to be degraded. (It is noted that in certain aspects where the PTM group is a ULM group, the target protein for degradation may be the ubiquitin ligase itself). In certain preferred aspects, the linker may be linked to an optionally substituted alkyl, alkylene, alkene or alkyne group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group on the ULM and/or PTM groups.

Exemplary PTMs

In preferred aspects of the disclosure, the PTM group is a group, which binds to target proteins. Targets of the PTM group are numerous in kind and are selected from proteins that are expressed in a cell such that at least a portion of the sequences is found in the cell and may bind to a PTM group. The term “protein” includes oligopeptides and polypeptide sequences of sufficient length that they can bind to a PTM group according to the present disclosure. Any protein in a eukaryotic system or a microbial system, including a virus, bacteria or fungus, as otherwise described herein, are targets for ubiquitination mediated by the compounds according to the present disclosure. Preferably, the target protein is a eukaryotic protein.

PTM groups according to the present disclosure include, for example, any moiety which binds to a protein specifically (binds to a target protein) and includes the following non-limiting examples of small molecule target protein moieties: KRas inhibitors, Hsp90 inhibitors, kinase inhibitors, HDM2 & MDM2 inhibitors, compounds targeting Human BET Bromodomain-containing proteins, HDAC inhibitors, human lysine methyltransferase inhibitors, angiogenesis inhibitors, nuclear hormone receptor compounds, immunosuppressive compounds, and compounds targeting the aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AHR), among numerous others. The compositions described below exemplify some of the members of small molecule target protein binding moieties. Such small molecule target protein binding moieties also include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, solvates and polymorphs of these compositions, as well as other small molecules that may target a protein of interest, such as KRas and/or mutant KRas, including gain-of-function KRas mutant(s), such as KRas G12C . These binding moieties are linked to the ubiquitin ligase binding moiety preferably through a linker in order to present a target protein (to which the protein target moiety is bound), such as KRas and/or gain-of-function KRas mutant(s), in proximity to the ubiquitin ligase for ubiquitination and degradation.

The present disclosure may be used to treat a number of disease states and/or conditions, including any disease state and/or condition in which proteins are dysregulated and where a patient would benefit from the degradation and/or inhibition of proteins.

In an additional aspect, the description provides therapeutic compositions comprising an effective amount of a compound as described herein or salt form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, additive or excipient, and optionally an additional bioactive agent. The therapeutic compositions modulate protein degradation in a patient or subject, for example, an animal such as a human, and can be used for treating or ameliorating disease states or conditions which are modulated through the degraded protein. In certain embodiments, the therapeutic compositions as described herein may be used to effectuate the degradation of proteins of interest for the treatment or amelioration of a disease, e.g., cancer (including, e.g., pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, or a combination thereof). In certain additional embodiments, the disease includes or is pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, breast cancer, or a combination thereof.

In alternative aspects, the present disclosure relates to a method for treating a disease state or ameliorating the symptoms of a disease or condition in a subject in need thereof by degrading a protein or polypeptide through which a disease state or condition is modulated comprising administering to said patient or subject an effective amount, e.g., a therapeutically effective amount, of at least one compound as described hereinabove, optionally in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, additive or excipient, and optionally an additional bioactive agent, wherein the composition is effective for treating or ameliorating the disease or disorder or symptom thereof in the subject. The method according to the present disclosure may be used to treat a large number of disease states or conditions including cancer (including, e.g., pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, breast cancer, or a combination thereof), by virtue of the administration of effective amounts of at least one compound described herein. The disease state or condition may be a disease caused by a microbial agent or other exogenous agent such as a virus, bacteria, fungus, protozoa or other microbe or may be a disease state, which is caused by overexpression of a protein, which leads to a disease state and/or condition.

In another aspect, the description provides methods for identifying the effects of the degradation of proteins of interest in a biological system using compounds according to the present disclosure.

The term “target protein” is used to describe a protein or polypeptide, which is a target for binding to a compound according to the present disclosure and degradation by ubiquitin ligase hereunder. For example, in any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM is a small molecule comprising a KRas protein targeting moiety. Such small molecule target protein binding moieties also include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, solvates and polymorphs of these compositions, as well as other small molecules that may target a protein of interest. These binding moieties are linked to at least one ULM group (e.g. VLM, CLM, ILM, and/or MLM) through at least one linker group L.

Target proteins, which may be bound to the protein target moiety and degraded by the ligase to which the ubiquitin ligase binding moiety is bound, include any protein or peptide, including fragments thereof, analogues thereof, and/or homologues thereof. Target proteins include proteins and peptides having any biological function or activity including structural, regulatory, hormonal, enzymatic, genetic, immunological, contractile, storage, transportation, and signal transduction. For example, in any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM is a KRas protein binding moiety.

These various protein targets, such as KRas protein, may be used in screens that identify compound moieties that bind to the protein and by incorporation of the moiety into compounds according to the present disclosure, the level of activity of the protein may be altered for therapeutic end result.

The term “protein target moiety” or PTM is used to describe a small molecule which binds to a target protein or other protein or polypeptide of interest and places/presents that protein or polypeptide in proximity to an ubiquitin ligase such that degradation of the protein or polypeptide by ubiquitin ligase may occur. Non-limiting examples of small molecule target protein binding moieties include KRas inhibitors, Hsp90 inhibitors, kinase inhibitors, MDM2 inhibitors, compounds targeting Human BET Bromodomain-containing proteins, HDAC inhibitors, human lysine methyltransferase inhibitors, angiogenesis inhibitors, immunosuppressive compounds, and compounds targeting the aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AHR), among numerous others. The compositions described below exemplify some of the members of the small molecule target proteins. Exemplary protein target moieties according to the present disclosure include, KRas inhibitors, haloalkane halogenase inhibitors, Hsp90 inhibitors, kinase inhibitors, MDM2 inhibitors, compounds targeting Human BET Bromodomain-containing proteins, HDAC inhibitors, human lysine methyltransferase inhibitors, angiogenesis inhibitors, immunosuppressive compounds, and compounds targeting the aryl hydrocarbon receptor (AHR).

The compositions described herein exemplify some of the members of these types of small molecule target protein binding moieties. Such small molecule target protein binding moieties also include pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, solvates and polymorphs of these compositions, as well as other small molecules that may target a protein of interest.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM is a KRas protein binding/targeting moiety, e.g., a small molecule comprising a KRas protein binding/targeting moiety. In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM binds mutant KRas, e.g. gain-of-function mutant KRas (such as KRas G12C ). In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM has a chemical structure represented by:

wherein:

is an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl;

X PTM is C or N; W PTM is chosen from the group consisting of optionally substitued C3-C6 cycloalkyl, and optionally substituted C3-C6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted C3-C6 heterocycloalkyl optionally substituted aryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 aryl), optionally substituted heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 heteroaryl); R PTM1A is NR PTM9 R PTM10 , OR PTM9 R PTM10 , H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted C3-C6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted O—(C3-C6 cycloalkyl), optionally substituted C3-C6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted —O—C 1-4 alkyl-C 3-6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted O—(C3-C6 heteroalkyl), optionally substituted O—C 1-4 alkyl-C 3-6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted O—C 1-4 alkyl-C 3-6 heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 aryl), optionally substituted O-aryl (e.g., optionally substituted O—(C5-C7 aryl)), optionally substituted heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 heteroaryl), optionally substituted O-heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted O—(C5-C7 heteroaryl)), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), wherein N* is a N atom of a heterocycloalkyl (e.g., a C 4 -C 8 heterocycloalkyl) of the linker (L);

R PTM1B is NR PTM9 R PTM10 , OR PTM9 R PTM10 , H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted O-alkyl, optionally substituted C3-C6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted O—(C3-C6 cycloalkyl), optionally substituted —O—C 1-4 alkyl-C 3-6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted C3-C6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted O—(C3-C6 heteroalkyl), optionally substituted O—C 1-4 alkyl-C 3-6 heteroalkyl, optionally substituted aryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 aryl), optionally substituted O-aryl (e.g., optionally substituted O—(C5-C7 aryl)), optionally substituted heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted C5-C7 heteroaryl), optionally substituted O-heteroaryl (e.g., optionally substituted O(C5-C7 heteroaryl)), optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl), optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

optionally substituted

R PTM9 and R PTM10 are each independently H, optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl, optionally substituted aliphatic amine, optionally substituted aliphatic amide;

R PTM2 is H, (C═O)R PTM2′ , optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl;

R PTM2′ is optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl, optionally substituted alkene, —N(R PTM8 ) 2 , or —C(OH) 2 ;

R PTM3 is alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, or napthalene, each independently substituted with OH, H, halogen;

R PTM4A is OH, H, halogen, optionally substituted linear or branched C1-C6 alkyl;

R PTM4B is OH, H, halogen, optionally substituted linear or branched C1-C6 alkyl;

R PTM5 is chosen from the group consisting of optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted biaryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted biheteroaryl, optionally substituted C3-C6 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted C3-C6 cycloheteroalkyl, halogen, H, optionally substituted linear or branched alkyl (e.g., optionally substituted linear or branched C 1 -C 6 alkyl), OH, and alkoxy;

R PTM8 is a H or an alkyl (e.g, a C1 alkyl, a C2 alkyl, a C3 alkyl, or a C4 alkyl);

t is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (such as 0, 1, 2, 3); and

the indicates the site of attachment of at least one of a linker, ULM, ULM′, CLM, CLM′, VLM, VLM′, ILM, ILM′, MLM, MLM′, or a combination thereof.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM has a chemical structure represented by:

wherein:

X PTM1 is NH or O; R PTM6 is aryl, heteroaryl,

wherein N* is a N atom of a heterocycloalkyl (e.g., a C4-C8 heterocycloalkyl) of the linker (L);

R PTM7 is H, aryl, O-aryl, heteroaryl, O-heteroaryl,

t is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (e.g., 1, 2, or 3);

R PTM9 is H, optionally substituted C1-C6 alkyl, optionally substituted aliphatic amine, optionally substituted aliphatic amide, or optionally substituted

(e.g., optionally substituted with at least one alkyl, such as the * carbon may be optionally substituted with an alkyl);

the can be a single bond or a double bond; and the indicates the site of attachment of at least one of a linker, ULM, ULM′, CLM, CLM′, VLM, VLM′, ILM, ILM′, MLM, MLM′, or a combination thereof.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM is selected from:

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the PTM is: (i) a PTM selected from a compound of Tables 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12; or (ii) a PTM of Table 1.

Therapeutic Compositions

Pharmaceutical compositions comprising combinations of an effective amount of at least one bifunctional compound as described herein, and one or more of the compounds otherwise described herein, all in effective amounts, in combination with a pharmaceutically effective amount of a carrier, additive or excipient, represents a further aspect of the present disclosure.

The present disclosure includes, where applicable, the compositions comprising the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, in particular, acid or base addition salts of compounds as described herein. The acids which are used to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of the aforementioned base compounds useful according to this aspect are those which form non-toxic acid addition salts, i.e., salts containing pharmacologically acceptable anions, such as the hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, acid phosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, acid citrate, tartrate, bitartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, gluconate, saccharate, benzoate, methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate and pamoate [i.e., 1,1′-methylene-bis-(2-hydroxy-3 naphthoate)]salts, among numerous others.

Pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts may also be used to produce pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms of the compounds or derivatives according to the present disclosure. The chemical bases that may be used as reagents to prepare pharmaceutically acceptable base salts of the present compounds that are acidic in nature are those that form non-toxic base salts with such compounds. Such non-toxic base salts include, but are not limited to those derived from such pharmacologically acceptable cations such as alkali metal cations (eg., potassium and sodium) and alkaline earth metal cations (eg, calcium, zinc and magnesium), ammonium or water-soluble amine addition salts such as N-methylglucamine-(meglumine), and the lower alkanolammonium and other base salts of pharmaceutically acceptable organic amines, among others.

The compounds as described herein may, in accordance with the disclosure, be administered in single or divided doses by the oral, parenteral or topical routes. Administration of the active compound may range from continuous (intravenous drip) to several oral administrations per day (for example, Q.I.D.) and may include oral, topical, parenteral, intramuscular, intravenous, sub-cutaneous, transdermal (which may include a penetration enhancement agent), buccal, sublingual and suppository administration, among other routes of administration. Enteric coated oral tablets may also be used to enhance bioavailability of the compounds from an oral route of administration. The most effective dosage form will depend upon the pharmacokinetics of the particular agent chosen as well as the severity of disease in the patient. Administration of compounds according to the present disclosure as sprays, mists, or aerosols for intra-nasal, intra-tracheal or pulmonary administration may also be used. The present disclosure therefore also is directed to pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of compound as described herein, optionally in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, additive or excipient. Compounds according to the present disclosure may be administered in immediate release, intermediate release or sustained or controlled release forms. Sustained or controlled release forms are preferably administered orally, but also in suppository and transdermal or other topical forms. Intramuscular injections in liposomal form may also be used to control or sustain the release of compound at an injection site.

The compositions as described herein may be formulated in a conventional manner using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and may also be administered in controlled-release formulations. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be used in these pharmaceutical compositions include, but are not limited to, ion exchangers, alumina, aluminum stearate, lecithin, serum proteins, such as human serum albumin, buffer substances such as phosphates, glycine, sorbic acid, potassium sorbate, partial glyceride mixtures of saturated vegetable fatty acids, water, salts or electrolytes, such as prolamine sulfate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium chloride, zinc salts, colloidal silica, magnesium trisilicate, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, cellulose-based substances, polyethylene glycol, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyacrylates, waxes, polyethylene-polyoxypropylene-block polymers, polyethylene glycol and wool fat.

The compositions as described herein may be administered orally, parenterally, by inhalation spray, topically, rectally, nasally, buccally, vaginally or via an implanted reservoir. The term “parenteral” as used herein includes subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-articular, intra-synovial, intrasternal, intrathecal, intrahepatic, intralesional and intracranial injection or infusion techniques. Preferably, the compositions are administered orally, intraperitoneally or intravenously.

Sterile injectable forms of the compositions as described herein may be aqueous or oleaginous suspension. These suspensions may be formulated according to techniques known in the art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation may also be a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a non-toxic parenterally-acceptable diluent or solvent, for example as a solution in 1, 3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose, any bland fixed oil may be employed including synthetic mono- or di-glycerides. Fatty acids, such as oleic acid and its glyceride derivatives are useful in the preparation of injectables, as are natural pharmaceutically-acceptable oils, such as olive oil or castor oil, especially in their polyoxyethylated versions. These oil solutions or suspensions may also contain a long-chain alcohol diluent or dispersant, such as Ph. Helv or similar alcohol.

The pharmaceutical compositions as described herein may be orally administered in any orally acceptable dosage form including, but not limited to, capsules, tablets, aqueous suspensions or solutions. In the case of tablets for oral use, carriers which are commonly used include lactose and corn starch. Lubricating agents, such as magnesium stearate, are also typically added. For oral administration in a capsule form, useful diluents include lactose and dried corn starch. When aqueous suspensions are required for oral use, the active ingredient is combined with emulsifying and suspending agents. If desired, certain sweetening, flavoring or coloring agents may also be added.

Alternatively, the pharmaceutical compositions as described herein may be administered in the form of suppositories for rectal administration. These can be prepared by mixing the agent with a suitable non-irritating excipient, which is solid at room temperature but liquid at rectal temperature and therefore will melt in the rectum to release the drug. Such materials include cocoa butter, beeswax and polyethylene glycols.

The pharmaceutical compositions as described herein may also be administered topically. Suitable topical formulations are readily prepared for each of these areas or organs. Topical application for the lower intestinal tract can be effected in a rectal suppository formulation (see above) or in a suitable enema formulation. Topically-acceptable transdermal patches may also be used.

For topical applications, the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated in a suitable ointment containing the active component suspended or dissolved in one or more carriers. Carriers for topical administration of the compounds of this disclosure include, but are not limited to, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, propylene glycol, polyoxyethylene, polyoxypropylene compound, emulsifying wax and water. In certain preferred aspects of the disclosure, the compounds may be coated onto a stent which is to be surgically implanted into a patient in order to inhibit or reduce the likelihood of occlusion occurring in the stent in the patient.

Alternatively, the pharmaceutical compositions can be formulated in a suitable lotion or cream containing the active components suspended or dissolved in one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. Suitable carriers include, but are not limited to, mineral oil, sorbitan monostearate, polysorbate 60, cetyl esters wax, cetearyl alcohol, 2-octyldodecanol, benzyl alcohol and water.

For ophthalmic use, the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as micronized suspensions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, or, preferably, as solutions in isotonic, pH adjusted sterile saline, either with our without a preservative such as benzylalkonium chloride. Alternatively, for ophthalmic uses, the pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated in an ointment such as petrolatum.

The pharmaceutical compositions as described herein may also be administered by nasal aerosol or inhalation. Such compositions are prepared according to techniques well-known in the art of pharmaceutical formulation and may be prepared as solutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bioavailability, fluorocarbons, and/or other conventional solubilizing or dispersing agents.

The amount of compound in a pharmaceutical composition as described herein that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host and disease treated, the particular mode of administration. Preferably, the compositions should be formulated to contain between about 0.05 milligram to about 750 milligrams or more, more preferably about 1 milligram to about 600 milligrams, and even more preferably about 10 milligrams to about 500 milligrams of active ingredient, alone or in combination with at least one other compound according to the present disclosure.

It should also be understood that a specific dosage and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors, including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination, and the judgment of the treating physician and the severity of the particular disease or condition being treated.

A patient or subject in need of therapy using compounds according to the methods described herein can be treated by administering to the patient (subject) an effective amount of the compound according to the present disclosure including pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates or polymorphs, thereof optionally in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent, either alone, or in combination with other known therapeutic agents as otherwise identified herein.

These compounds can be administered by any appropriate route, for example, orally, parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, subcutaneously, or topically, including transdermally, in liquid, cream, gel, or solid form, or by aerosol form.

The active compound is included in the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent in an amount sufficient to deliver to a patient a therapeutically effective amount for the desired indication, without causing serious toxic effects in the patient treated. A preferred dose of the active compound for all of the herein-mentioned conditions is in the range from about 10 ng/kg to 300 mg/kg, preferably 0.1 to 100 mg/kg per day, more generally 0.5 to about 25 mg per kilogram body weight of the recipient/patient per day. A typical topical dosage will range from 0.01-5% wt/wt in a suitable carrier.

The compound is conveniently administered in any suitable unit dosage form, including but not limited to one containing less than 1 mg, 1 mg to 3000 mg, preferably 5 to 500 mg of active ingredient per unit dosage form. An oral dosage of about 25-250 mg is often convenient.

The active ingredient is preferably administered to achieve peak plasma concentrations of the active compound of about 0.00001-30 mM, preferably about 0.1-30 μM. This may be achieved, for example, by the intravenous injection of a solution or formulation of the active ingredient, optionally in saline, or an aqueous medium or administered as a bolus of the active ingredient. Oral administration is also appropriate to generate effective plasma concentrations of active agent.

The concentration of active compound in the drug composition will depend on absorption, distribution, inactivation, and excretion rates of the drug as well as other factors known to those of skill in the art. It is to be noted that dosage values will also vary with the severity of the condition to be alleviated. It is to be further understood that for any particular subject, specific dosage regimens should be adjusted over time according to the individual need and the professional judgment of the person administering or supervising the administration of the compositions, and that the concentration ranges set forth herein are exemplary only and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of the claimed composition. The active ingredient may be administered at once, or may be divided into a number of smaller doses to be administered at varying intervals of time.

Oral compositions will generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They may be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound or its prodrug derivative can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition.

The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a dispersing agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it can contain, in addition to material of the above type, a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unit forms can contain various other materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings of sugar, shellac, or enteric agents.

The active compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered as a component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, chewing gum or the like. A syrup may contain, in addition to the active compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.

The active compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof can also be mixed with other active materials that do not impair the desired action, or with materials that supplement the desired action, such as anti-cancer agents, including epidermal growth factor receptor inhibitors, EPO and darbapoietin alfa, among others. In certain preferred aspects of the disclosure, one or more compounds according to the present disclosure are coadministered with another bioactive agent, such as an anti-cancer agent or a would healing agent, including an antibiotic, as otherwise described herein.

Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous, or topical application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The parental preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

If administered intravenously, preferred carriers are physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).

In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art.

Liposomal suspensions may also be pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These may be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811 (which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). For example, liposome formulations may be prepared by dissolving appropriate lipid(s) (such as stearoyl phosphatidyl ethanolamine, stearoyl phosphatidyl choline, arachadoyl phosphatidyl choline, and cholesterol) in an inorganic solvent that is then evaporated, leaving behind a thin film of dried lipid on the surface of the container. An aqueous solution of the active compound are then introduced into the container. The container is then swirled by hand to free lipid material from the sides of the container and to disperse lipid aggregates, thereby forming the liposomal suspension.

Therapeutic Methods

In an additional aspect, the description provides therapeutic compositions comprising an effective amount of a compound as described herein or salt form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. The therapeutic compositions modulate protein degradation in a patient or subject, for example, an animal such as a human, and can be used for treating or ameliorating disease states or conditions which are modulated through the degraded protein.

The terms “treat”, “treating”, and “treatment”, etc., as used herein, refer to any action providing a benefit to a patient for which the present compounds may be administered, including the treatment of any disease state or condition which is modulated through the protein to which the present compounds bind. Disease states or conditions, including cancer (e.g., at least one of pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, breast cancer, or combinations thereof), which may be treated using compounds according to the present disclosure are set forth hereinabove.

The description provides therapeutic compositions as described herein for effectuating the degradation of proteins of interest for the treatment or amelioration of a disease, e.g., cancer (such as pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, or breast cancer). In certain additional embodiments, the disease is multiple myeloma. As such, in another aspect, the description provides a method of ubiquitinating/degrading a target protein in a cell. In certain embodiments, the method comprises administering a bifunctional compound as described herein comprising, e.g., a ULM and a PTM, preferably linked through a linker moiety, as otherwise described herein, wherein the ULM is coupled to the PTM and wherein the ULM recognizes a ubiquitin pathway protein (e.g., an ubiquitin ligase, such as an E3 ubiquitin ligase including cereblon, VHL, IAP, and/or MDM2) and the PTM recognizes the target protein such that degradation of the target protein will occur when the target protein is placed in proximity to the ubiquitin ligase, thus resulting in degradation/inhibition of the effects of the target protein and the control of protein levels. The control of protein levels afforded by the present disclosure provides treatment of a disease state or condition, which is modulated through the target protein by lowering the level of that protein in the cell, e.g., cell of a patient. In certain embodiments, the method comprises administering an effective amount of a compound as described herein, optionally including a pharamaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, adjuvant, another bioactive agent or combination thereof.

In additional embodiments, the description provides methods for treating or ameliorating a disease, disorder or symptom thereof in a subject or a patient, e.g., an animal such as a human, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a composition comprising an effective amount, e.g., a therapeutically effective amount, of a compound as described herein or salt form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient, carrier, adjuvant, another bioactive agent or combination thereof, wherein the composition is effective for treating or ameliorating the disease or disorder or symptom thereof in the subject.

In another aspect, the description provides methods for identifying the effects of the degradation of proteins of interest in a biological system using compounds according to the present disclosure.

In another embodiment, the present disclosure is directed to a method of treating a human patient in need for a disease state or condition modulated through a protein where the degradation of that protein will produce a therapeutic effect in the patient, the method comprising administering to a patient in need an effective amount of a compound according to the present disclosure, optionally in combination with another bioactive agent. The disease state or condition may be a disease caused by a microbial agent or other exogenous agent such as a virus, bacteria, fungus, protozoa or other microbe or may be a disease state, which is caused by overexpression of a protein, which leads to a disease state and/or condition

The term “disease state or condition” is used to describe any disease state or condition wherein protein dysregulation (i.e., the amount of protein expressed in a patient is elevated) occurs and where degradation of one or more proteins in a patient may provide beneficial therapy or relief of symptoms to a patient in need thereof. In certain instances, the disease state or condition may be cured.

Disease states or conditions which may be treated using compounds according to the present disclosure include, for example, asthma, autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis, various cancers, ciliopathies, cleft palate, diabetes, heart disease, hypertension, inflammatory bowel disease, mental retardation, mood disorder, obesity, refractive error, infertility, Angelman syndrome, Canavan disease, Coeliac disease, Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease, Cystic fibrosis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Haemochromatosis, Haemophilia, Klinefelter's syndrome, Neurofibromatosis, Phenylketonuria, Polycystic kidney disease, (PKD1) or 4 (PKD2) Prader-Willi syndrome, Sickle-cell disease, Tay-Sachs disease, Turner syndrome.

The term “neoplasia” or “cancer” is used throughout the specification to refer to the pathological process that results in the formation and growth of a cancerous or malignant neoplasm, i.e., abnormal tissue that grows by cellular proliferation, often more rapidly than normal and continues to grow after the stimuli that initiated the new growth cease. In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the disease or disorder is a cancer or neoplasia selected from pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, lung cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, cervical cancer, bladder cancer, liver cancer, myeloid leukemia, or breast cancer (e.g., a cancer or neoplasia selected from pancreatic cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, or non-small cell lung cancer). Malignant neoplasms show partial or complete lack of structural organization and functional coordination with the normal tissue and most invade surrounding tissues, metastasize to several sites, and are likely to recur after attempted removal and to cause the death of the patient unless adequately treated. As used herein, the term neoplasia is used to describe all cancerous disease states and embraces or encompasses the pathological process associated with malignant hematogenous, ascitic and solid tumors. Exemplary cancers which may be treated by the present compounds either alone or in combination with at least one additional anti-cancer agent include squamous-cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, hepatocellular carcinomas, and renal cell carcinomas, cancer of the bladder, bowel, breast, cervix, colon, esophagus, head, kidney, liver, lung, neck, ovary, pancreas, prostate, and stomach; leukemias; benign and malignant lymphomas, particularly Burkitt's lymphoma and Non-Hodgkin's lymphoma; benign and malignant melanomas; myeloproliferative diseases; sarcomas, including Ewing's sarcoma, hemangiosarcoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, liposarcoma, myosarcomas, peripheral neuroepithelioma, synovial sarcoma, gliomas, astrocytomas, oligodendrogliomas, ependymomas, gliobastomas, neuroblastomas, ganglioneuromas, gangliogliomas, medulloblastomas, pineal cell tumors, meningiomas, meningeal sarcomas, neurofibromas, and Schwannomas; bowel cancer, breast cancer, prostate cancer, non-small cell lung cancer, biliary tract malignancies, endometrial cancer, myeloid leukemia, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, testicular cancer, thyroid cancer, astrocytoma, esophageal cancer, pancreatic cancer, stomach cancer, liver cancer, colon cancer, melanoma; carcinosarcoma, Hodgkin's disease, Wilms' tumor and teratocarcinomas. Additional cancers which may be treated using compounds according to the present disclosure include, for example, T-lineage Acute lymphoblastic Leukemia (T-ALL), T-lineage lymphoblastic Lymphoma (T-LL), Peripheral T-cell lymphoma, Adult T-cell Leukemia, Pre-B ALL, Pre-B Lymphomas, Large B-cell Lymphoma, Burkitts Lymphoma, B-cell ALL, Philadelphia chromosome positive ALL and Philadelphia chromosome positive CML.

The term “bioactive agent” is used to describe an agent, other than a compound according to the present disclosure, which is used in combination with the present compounds as an agent with biological activity to assist in effecting an intended therapy, inhibition and/or prevention/prophylaxis for which the present compounds are used. Preferred bioactive agents for use herein include those agents which have pharmacological activity similar to that for which the present compounds are used or administered and include for example, anti-cancer agents, antiviral agents, especially including anti-HIV agents and anti-HCV agents, antimicrobial agents, antifungal agents, etc.

The term “additional anti-cancer agent” is used to describe an anti-cancer agent, which may be combined with compounds according to the present disclosure to treat cancer. These agents include, for example, everolimus, trabectedin, abraxane, TLK 286, AV-299, DN-101, pazopanib, GSK690693, RTA 744, ON 0910.Na, AZD 6244 (ARRY-142886), AMN-107, TKI-258, GSK461364, AZD 1152, enzastaurin, vandetanib, ARQ-197, MK-0457, MLN8054, PHA-739358, R-763, AT-9263, a FLT-3 inhibitor, a VEGFR inhibitor, an EGFR TK inhibitor, an aurora kinase inhibitor, a PIK-1 modulator, a Bcl-2 inhibitor, an HDAC inhbitor, a c-MET inhibitor, a PARP inhibitor, a Cdk inhibitor, an EGFR TK inhibitor, an IGFR-TK inhibitor, an anti-HGF antibody, a PI3 kinase inhibitor, an AKT inhibitor, an mTORC1/2 inhibitor, a JAK/STAT inhibitor, a checkpoint-1 or 2 inhibitor, a focal adhesion kinase inhibitor, a Map kinase kinase (mek) inhibitor, a VEGF trap antibody, pemetrexed, erlotinib, dasatanib, nilotinib, decatanib, panitumumab, amrubicin, oregovomab, Lep-etu, nolatrexed, azd2171, batabulin, ofatumumab, zanolimumab, edotecarin, tetrandrine, rubitecan, tesmilifene, oblimersen, ticilimumab, ipilimumab, gossypol, Bio 111, 131—I-TM-601, ALT-110, BIO 140, CC 8490 , cilengitide, gimatecan, IL13-PE38QQR, INO 1001, IPdR 1 KRX-0402, lucanthone, LY317615, neuradiab, vitespan, Rta 744, Sdx 102, talampanel, atrasentan, Xr 311, romidepsin, ADS-100380, sunitinib, 5-fluorouracil, vorinostat, etoposide, gemcitabine, doxorubicin, liposomal doxorubicin, 5′-deoxy-5-fluorouridine, vincristine, temozolomide, ZK-304709, seliciclib; PD0325901, AZD-6244, capecitabine, L-Glutamic acid, N-[4-[2-(2-amino-4,7-dihydro-4-oxo-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl)ethyl]benzoyl]-, disodium salt, heptahydrate, camptothecin, PEG-labeled irinotecan, tamoxifen, toremifene citrate, anastrazole, exemestane, letrozole, DES(diethylstilbestrol), estradiol, estrogen, conjugated estrogen, bevacizumab, IMC-1C11, CHIR-258); 3-[5-methylsulfonylpiperadinemethyl)-indolyl-quinolone, vatalanib, AG-013736, AVE-0005, goserelin acetate, leuprolide acetate, triptorelin pamoate, medroxyprogesterone acetate, hydroxyprogesterone caproate, megestrol acetate, raloxifene, bicalutamide, flutamide, nilutamide, megestrol acetate, CP-724714; TAK-165, HKI-272, erlotinib, lapatanib, canertinib, ABX-EGF antibody, erbitux, EKB-569, PKI-166, GW-572016, lonafarnib, BMS-214662, tipifarnib; amifostine, NVP-LAQ824, suberoyl analide hydroxamic acid, valproic acid, trichostatin A, FK-228, SU11248, sorafenib, KRN951, aminoglutethimide, amsacrine, anagrelide, L-asparaginase, Bacillus Calmette-Guerin (BCG) vaccine, adriamycin, bleomycin, buserelin, busulfan, carboplatin, carmustine, chlorambucil, cisplatin, cladribine, clodronate, cyproterone, cytarabine, dacarbazine, dactinomycin, daunorubicin, diethylstilbestrol, epirubicin, fludarabine, fludrocortisone, fluoxymesterone, flutamide, gleevec, gemcitabine, hydroxyurea, idarubicin, ifosfamide, imatinib, leuprolide, levamisole, lomustine, mechlorethamine, melphalan, 6-mercaptopurine, mesna, methotrexate, mitomycin, mitotane, mitoxantrone, nilutamide, octreotide, oxaliplatin, pamidronate, pentostatin, plicamycin, porfimer, procarbazine, raltitrexed, rituximab, streptozocin, teniposide, testosterone, thalidomide, thioguanine, thiotepa, tretinoin, vindesine, 13-cis-retinoic acid, phenylalanine mustard, uracil mustard, estramustine, altretamine, floxuridine, 5-deooxyuridine, cytosine arabinoside, 6-mecaptopurine, deoxycoformycin, calcitriol, valrubicin, mithramycin, vinblastine, vinorelbine, topotecan, razoxin, marimastat, COL-3, neovastat, BMS-275291, squalamine, endostatin, SU5416, SU6668, EMD121974, interleukin-12, IM862, angiostatin, vitaxin, droloxifene, idoxyfene, spironolactone, finasteride, cimitidine, trastuzumab, denileukin diftitox, gefitinib, bortezimib, paclitaxel, cremophor-free paclitaxel, docetaxel, epithilone B, BMS-247550, BMS-310705, droloxifene, 4-hydroxytamoxifen, pipendoxifene, ERA-923, arzoxifene, fulvestrant, acolbifene, lasofoxifene, idoxifene, TSE-424, HMR-3339, ZK186619, topotecan, PTK787/ZK 222584, VX-745, PD 184352, rapamycin, 40-O-(2-hydroxyethyl)-rapamycin, temsirolimus, AP-23573, RAD001, ABT-578, BC-210, LY294002, LY292223, LY292696, LY293684, LY293646, wortmannin, ZM336372, L-779,450, PEG-filgrastim, darbepoetin, erythropoietin, granulocyte colony-stimulating factor, zolendronate, prednisone, cetuximab, granulocyte macrophage colony-stimulating factor, histrelin, pegylated interferon alfa-2a, interferon alfa-2a, pegylated interferon alfa-2b, interferon alfa-2b, azacitidine, PEG-L-asparaginase, lenalidomide, gemtuzumab, hydrocortisone, interleukin-11, dexrazoxane, alemtuzumab, all-transretinoic acid, ketoconazole, interleukin-2, megestrol, immune globulin, nitrogen mustard, methylprednisolone, ibritgumomab tiuxetan, androgens, decitabine, hexamethylmelamine, bexarotene, tositumomab, arsenic trioxide, cortisone, editronate, mitotane, cyclosporine, liposomal daunorubicin, Edwina-asparaginase, strontium 89, casopitant, netupitant, an NK-1 receptor antagonist, palonosetron, aprepitant, diphenhydramine, hydroxyzine, metoclopramide, lorazepam, alprazolam, haloperidol, droperidol, dronabinol, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prochlorperazine, granisetron, ondansetron, dolasetron, tropisetron, pegfilgrastim, erythropoietin, epoetin alfa, darbepoetin alfa and mixtures thereof.

In any aspect or embodiment described herein, the bioactive agent or additional anti-cancer agent is a chemotherapy or biological therapy that targets epidermal growth factor receptors (e.g., an epidermal growth factor receptor inhibitor, such as at least one of gefitinib, erlotinib, neratinib, lapatinib, cetuximab, vandetanib, necitumamab, osimertinib, or a combination thereof).

The term “anti-HIV agent” or “additional anti-HIV agent” includes, for example, nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors (NRTI), other non-nucloeoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors (i.e., those which are not representative of the present disclosure), protease inhibitors, fusion inhibitors, among others, exemplary compounds of which may include, for example, 3TC (Lamivudine), AZT (Zidovudine), (−)-FTC, ddI (Didanosine), ddC (zalcitabine), abacavir (ABC), tenofovir (PMPA), D-D4FC (Reverset), D4T (Stavudine), Racivir, L-FddC, L-FD4C, NVP (Nevirapine), DLV (Delavirdine), EFV (Efavirenz), SQVM (Saquinavir mesylate), RTV (Ritonavir), IDV (Indinavir), SQV (Saquinavir), NFV (Nelfinavir), APV (Amprenavir), LPV (Lopinavir), fusion inhibitors such as T20, among others, fuseon and mixtures thereof, including anti-HIV compounds presently in clinical trials or in development.

Other anti-HIV agents which may be used in coadministration with compounds according to the present disclosure include, for example, other NNRTI's (i.e., other than the NNRTI's according to the present disclosure) may be selected from the group consisting of nevirapine (BI-R6-587), delavirdine (U-90152S/T), efavirenz (DMP-266), UC-781 (N-[4-chloro-3-(3-methyl-2-butenyloxy)phenyl]-2methyl3-furancarbothiamide), etravirine (TMC125), Trovirdine (Ly300046.HCl), MKC-442 (emivirine, coactinon), HI-236, HI-240, HI-280, HI-281, rilpivirine (TMC-278), MSC-127, HBY 097, DMP266, Baicalin (TJN-151) ADAM-II (Methyl 3′,3′-dichloro-4′,4″-dimethoxy-5′,5″-bis(methoxycarbonyl)-6,6-diphenylhexenoate), Methyl 3-Bromo-5-(1-5-bromo-4-methoxy-3-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl)hept-1-enyl)-2-methoxybenzoate (Alkenyldiarylmethane analog, Adam analog), (5-chloro-3-(phenylsulfinyl)-2′-indolecarboxamide), AAP-BHAP (U-104489 or PNU-104489), Capravirine (AG-1549, S-1153), atevirdine (U-87201E), aurin tricarboxylic acid (SD-095345), 1-[(6-cyano-2-indolyl)carbonyl]-4-[3-(isopropylamino)-2-pyridinyl]piperazine, 1-[5-[[N-(methyl)methylsulfonylamino]-2-indolylcarbonyl-4-[3-(isopropylamino)-2-pyridinyl]piperazine, 1-[3-(Ethylamino)-2-[pyridinyl]-4-[(5-hydroxy-2-indolyl)carbonyl]piperazine, 1-[(6-Formyl-2-indolyl)carbonyl]-4-[3-(isopropylamino)-2-pyridinyl]piperazine, 1-[[5-(Methylsulfonyloxy)-2-indoyly)carbonyl]-4-[3-(isopropylamino)-2-pyridinyl]piperazine, U88204E, Bis(2-nitrophenyl)sulfone (NSC 633001), Calanolide A (NSC675451), Calanolide B, 6-Benzyl-5-methyl-2-(cyclohexyloxy)pyrimidin-4-one (DABO-546), DPC 961, E-EBU, E-EBU-dm, E-EPSeU, E-EPU, Foscarnet (Foscavir), HEPT (1-[(2-Hydroxyethoxy)methyl]-6-(phenylthio)thymine), HEPT-M (1-[(2-Hydroxyethoxy)methyl]-6-(3-methylphenyl)thio)thymine), HEPT-S (1-[(2-Hydroxyethoxy)methyl]-6-(phenylthio)-2-thiothymine), Inophyllum P, L-737,126, Michellamine A (NSC650898), Michellamine B (NSC649324), Michellamine F, 6-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyl)-1-[(2-hydroxyethoxy)methyl]-5-isopropyluracil, 6-(3,5-Dimethylbenzyl)-1-(ethyoxymethyl)-5-isopropyluracil, NPPS, E-BPTU (NSC 648400), Oltipraz (4-Methyl-5-(pyrazinyl)-3H-1,2-dithiole-3-thione), N-{2-(2-Chloro-6-fluorophenethyl]-N′-(2-thiazolyl)thiourea (PETT Cl, F derivative), N-{2-(2,6-Difluorophenethyl]-N′-[2-(5-bromopyridyl)]thiourea {PETT derivative), N-{2-(2,6-Difluorophenethyl]-N′-[2-(5-methylpyridyl)]thiourea {PETT Pyridyl derivative), N-[2-(3-Fluorofuranyl)ethyl]-N′-[2-(5-chloropyridyl)]thiourea, N-[2-(2-Fluoro-6-ethoxyphenethyl)]-N′-[2-(5-bromopyridyl)]thiourea, N-(2-Phenethyl)-N′-(2-thiazolyl)thiourea (LY-73497), L-697,639, L-697,593, L-697,661, 3-[(2-(4,7-Difluorobenzoxazol-2-yl)ethyl}-5-ethyl-6-methyl(pypridin-2(1H)-thione (2-Pyridinone Derivative), 3-[[(2-Methoxy-5,6-dimethyl-3-pyridyl)methyl]amine]-5-ethyl-6-methyl(pypridin-2(1H)-thione, R82150, R82913, R87232, R88703, R89439 (Loviride), R90385, S-2720, Suramin Sodium, TBZ (Thiazolobenzimidazole, NSC 625487), Thiazoloisoindol-5-one, (+)(R)-9b-(3,5-Dimethylphenyl-2,3-dihydrothiazolo[2,3-a]isoindol-5(9bH)-one, Tivirapine (R86183), UC-38 and UC-84, among others.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” is used throughout the specification to describe, where applicable, a salt form of one or more of the compounds described herein which are presented to increase the solubility of the compound in the gastic juices of the patient's gastrointestinal tract in order to promote dissolution and the bioavailability of the compounds. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include those derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic bases and acids, where applicable. Suitable salts include those derived from alkali metals such as potassium and sodium, alkaline earth metals such as calcium, magnesium and ammonium salts, among numerous other acids and bases well known in the pharmaceutical art. Sodium and potassium salts are particularly preferred as neutralization salts of the phosphates according to the present disclosure.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable derivative” is used throughout the specification to describe any pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug form (such as an ester, amide other prodrug group), which, upon administration to a patient, provides directly or indirectly the present compound or an active metabolite of the present compound.

General Synthetic Approach

The synthetic realization and optimization of the bifunctional molecules as described herein may be approached in a step-wise or modular fashion. For example, identification of compounds that bind to the target molecules can involve high or medium throughput screening campaigns if no suitable ligands are immediately available. It is not unusual for initial ligands to require iterative design and optimization cycles to improve suboptimal aspects as identified by data from suitable in vitro and pharmacological and/or ADMET assays. Part of the optimization/SAR campaign would be to probe positions of the ligand that are tolerant of substitution and that might be suitable places on which to attach the linker chemistry previously referred to herein. Where crystallographic or NMR structural data are available, these can be used to focus such a synthetic effort.

In a very analogous way one can identify and optimize ligands for an E3 Ligase, i.e. ULMs/ILMs/VLMs/CLMs/ILMs.

With PTMs and ULMs (e.g. ILMs, VLMs, CLMs, and/or ILMs) in hand, one skilled in the art can use known synthetic methods for their combination with or without a linker moiety. Linker moieties can be synthesized with a range of compositions, lengths and flexibility and functionalized such that the PTM and ULM groups can be attached sequentially to distal ends of the linker. Thus a library of bifunctional molecules can be realized and profiled in in vitro and in vivo pharmacological and ADMET/PK studies. As with the PTM and ULM groups, the final bifunctional molecules can be subject to iterative design and optimization cycles in order to identify molecules with desirable properties.

In some instances, protecting group strategies and/or functional group interconversions (FGIs) may be required to facilitate the preparation of the desired materials. Such chemical processes are well known to the synthetic organic chemist and many of these may be found in texts such as “Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” Peter G. M. Wuts and Theodora W. Greene (Wiley), and “Organic Synthesis: The Disconnection Approach” Stuart Warren and Paul Wyatt (Wiley).

DIEA or DIPEA: diisopropylethylamine

DMF: N,N-dimethylformamide

DMSO: Dimethyl sulfoxide

EDCI: 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide

HOBt: hydroxybenzotriazole

Exemplary Synthesis of Intermediates.

Exemplary syntheses of intermediates which may be used for synthesis of compounds of the invention are described in Schemes A through I.

A compound of formula I, which is commercially available or readily prepared using standard reaction techniques known to one skilled in the art, may be reacted with a compound of formula II under conditions suitable for a nucleophilic aromatic substitution reaction, e.g. using a suitable base such as diisopropylethylamine in a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylpyrrolidone. Herein, Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring, or is carboxylate; PG is H or a suitable optional protecting group, including but not limited to t-butoxycarbonyl when Y is a primary or secondary amine or t-butyl when Y is carboxylate; L is an optional linker; Nu is a suitable nucleophilic group such as O or a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; X is a suitable leaving group such as fluoride or chloride; and Z is CH 2 or C═O. In cases where III contains an optional protecting group PG, PG may be removed under suitable conditions, e.g. hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane when PG-Y is t-butoxycarbonylamino, or trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when PG-Y is t-butyl-carboxylate, to afford a compound of formula IV. In cases where PG is H, it is understood that III and IV are identical structures.

Alternatively, a compound of formula V, which is commercially available or readily prepared using standard reaction techniques known to one skilled in the art, may be reacted with a compound of formula VI to prepare a compound of formula VII. Herein PG, Y, and L are as defined in Scheme A; Z is CH 2 , and Nu is O. LG may be a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, bromide, or iodide, in which case the reaction conditions are those for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. employing a suitable base such as potassium carbonate and a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide. Alternatively, LG may be H, in which case the reaction conditions are those for a Mitsunobu reaction, e.g. triphenylphosphine and diisopropylazodicarboxylate. A compound of formula VII may then be converted to a compound of formula IV using conditions suitable for an imide ring closure and concomitant removal of PG as necessary, e.g. p-toluenesulfonic acid or benzenesulfonic acid in acetonitrile at 80° C.

Alternatively, a compound of formula V, may be reacted with a compound of formula VIII to prepare a compound of formula III. Herein Z is C═O, and all other groups are as defined in Scheme B. LG may be a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, in which case the reaction conditions are those for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. employing a suitable base such as potassium carbonate and a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide. A compound of formula III may then be converted to a compound of formula IV using conditions as described in Scheme A. Compounds of formula IV may be further converted to additional compounds of formula IV, e.g. via functional group manipulation in the linker L, using techniques known to one skilled in the art. For example, if L contains an alkene, such alkene may be reduced under hydrogenation conditions, e.g. H 2 , palladium on carbon in methanol, to afford the corresponding alkane.

A compound of formula VIII may be reacted with a compound of formula IX to produce compounds of formula X under amide formation conditions, e.g. hydroxybenzotriazole, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide or 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine or triethylamine in dichloromethane. Herein Z is an optional substituent, e.g. H, methyl, or hydroxymethyl, Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring, or is carboxylate; PG is a suitable optional protecting group, including but not limited to t-butoxycarbonyl when Y is a primary or secondary amine or methyl when Y is carboxylate; and L is an optional linker. A compound of formula X may then be converted to a compound of formula XI by removal of PG under suitable conditions, e.g. hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane or dichloromethane when PG-Y is t-butoxycarbonylamino, or sodium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide in water mixed with tetrahydrofuran and/or methanol or hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane when PG-Y is methyl carboxylate.

A compound of formula XII may be reacted with a compound of formula V to prepare a compound of formula XIII. Herein LG may be a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, bromide, or iodide; L is an optional linker; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring, or is carboxylate; PG is H or a suitable optional protecting group, including but not limited to t-butoxycarbonyl when Y is a primary or secondary amine or t-butyl when Y is carboxylate; or alternatively PG-Y together are LG′, a suitable leaving group which may be the same or different from LG. The reaction conditions for the preparation of a compound of formula XIII are those for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. employing a suitable base such as potassium carbonate and a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide at a temperature such as 80° C. PG may be removed under suitable conditions, e.g. hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane when PG-Y is t-butoxycarbonylamino, or trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when PG-Y is t-butyl-carboxylate; or alternatively when PG-Y are together LG′ they may be treated with a nucleophile, e.g. a primary amine in ethanol, in which case Y in XIV becomes a secondary amine, to afford a compound of formula XIV. In cases where PG is H, it is understood that XIII and XIV are identical structures. As needed, mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers of any compounds XIII or XIV may be resolved into their constituent enantiomers or diasteromers using techniques known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to preparative high performance liquid chromatography or preparative supercritical fluid chromatography.

A compound of formula XV may be reacted with a compound V (readily prepared using standard reaction techniques known to one skilled in the art) to prepare a compound of formula XVI under nucleophilic substitution conditions, e.g. using a suitable base such as potassium carbonate in a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide. Herein, PG, Y, L, and LG in compound V are as defined in Scheme B; and PG′ represents a suitable ester protecting group, e.g. methyl, ethyl, or t-butyl. Compounds of formula XVI may be converted to a compound of formula XVIII by treatment with a reagent suitable for the removal of PG′, e.g. sodium hydroxide or lithium hydroxide in methanol and water when PG′ is methyl or ethyl or trifloroacetic acid with PG′ is t-butyl. Compound XVII may be reacted with with a compound of formula XVIII, wherein Z is an optional substituent, e.g. H, methyl, or hydroxymethyl and R is an optional substituent, to produce compounds of formula XIX under amide formation conditions, e.g. 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide, diisopropylethylamine, N,N-dimethylformamide. A compound of formula XIX may be converted to a compound of formula XX by removal of PG under suitable conditions, e.g. hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane when PG-Y is t-butoxycarbonylamino, or trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when PG-Y is t-butyl-carboxylate; or alternatively when PG-Y are together a suitable leaving group which may be the same or different from LG they may be treated with a nucleophile, e.g. a primary amine in ethanol, in which case Y in XX becomes a secondary amine. In cases where PG is H, it is understood that XIX and XX are identical structures. As needed, mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers of any compounds XVI, XVII, XIX, or XX may be resolved into their constituent enantiomers or diasteromers using techniques known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to preparative high performance liquid chromatography or preparative supercritical fluid chromatography.

A compound of formula XXI may be reacted with a compound of formula I under conditions suitable an amide coupling, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide, to afford a compound of formula XXII. Herein Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; PG is H or a suitable optional protecting group, including but not limited to t-butoxycarbonyl; L is an optional linker; and Nu is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring. In cases where XXII contains an optional protecting group PG, PG may be removed under suitable conditions, e.g. hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane when PG-Y is t-butoxycarbonylamino, to afford a compound of formula XXIII. In cases where PG is H, it is understood that XXII and XXIII are identical structures.

A compound of formula XXIV may be reacted with a compound of formula V to prepare a compound of formula XXV. Herein LG may be a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, bromide, or iodide; L is an optional linker; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring and PG is H or a suitable optional protecting group, including but not limited to benzyloxycarbonyl or 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxycarbonyl; or alternatively PG-Y together are LG′, a suitable leaving group which may be the same or different from LG; and IAP is either:

The reaction conditions are those for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. employing a suitable base such as potassium carbonate and a suitable solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile at a temperature such as 70-80° C. PG may be removed under suitable conditions to afford a compound of formula XXVI, e.g. hydrogen, palladium on carbon when PG-Y is benzyloxycarbonylamino, or tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride in tetrahydrofuran when PG-Y is 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxycarbonylamino; or alternatively when PG-Y are together LG′ they may be treated with a nucleophile, e.g. a primary amine in ethanol at 60° C., in which case Y in XXVI becomes a secondary amine. In cases where PG is H, it is understood that XXV and XXVI are identical structures.

Alternatively, a compound of formula XXIV as defined in Scheme H, may be reacted with a different compound of formula V wherein PG is a suitable protecting group, such as tetrahydropyranyl, Y is O, L is an optional linker, and LG is a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, bromide, or iodide, under conditions of a nucleophilic substitution, e.g. potassium carbonate and potassium iodide in N,N-dimethylformamide at 70° C., to afford a compound of formula XXVII. The compound of formula XXVII may be deprotected, e.g. with pyridinium p-toluenesulfonate in methanol, to afford a compound XXVIII. A compound of formula XXVIII may be converted to a compound of formula XXIX by treatment with e.g. p-toluenesulfonyl chloride, triethylamine, N,N-dimethylaminopyridine in dichloromethane. Finally, a compound of formula XXIX may be treated with a nucleophile, e.g. a primary amine in ethanol at 60° C., converting it to a compound of formula XXVI as described in Scheme H.

General Synthetic Schemes:

Compounds of the invention may be synthesized as shown in Schemes 1 through 19, making use of the intermediate structures described in Schemes A through I.

A compound of formula XXX may be reacted with a compound of formula IV under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole and N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide, diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to afford a compound of formula XXXI.

Herein,

is an aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl; each X is independently CH or N; R 1 is one or more independent alkyl, alkoxy, phenyl, or napthalene, each of which may be independently substituted with OH, H, and/or halogen; R 2 is an optionally substituted alkyl amide, alkenyl amide, urea, or a suitable protecting group such as t-butoxycarbonyl; R 3 is an optional substituent; L′ is an optional linker; W is a carboxylic acid; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L, Nu, and Z are as defined in one of Schemes A, B, or C.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXI under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula IV under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to form a compound of formula XXXII.

Herein, R 2 is H; L′-W together are H or form an optional substitution;

X, R 1 , R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a carboxylic acid; and L, Nu, and Z are as defined in one of Schemes A, B, or C.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XI under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide afford a compound of formula XXXIII

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , L′, and W are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and Z are as defined in Scheme D.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXIII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XI under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to form a compound of formula XXXIV.

Herein, R 2 is H; L′-W together are H or form an optional substitution;

X, R 1 , R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a carboxylic acid; and L and Z are as defined in Scheme D.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XXVI under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide afford a compound of formula XXXV.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , L′, and W are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and IAP are as defined in one of Schemes H or I.

The t-butoxycarbonyl group contained in the structure of IAP may then be removed under suitable conditions, for example hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane or tifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane, to afford different compounds of formula XXXV where the structure of IAP is either:

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XXIII under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide afford a compound of formula XXXVI.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , L′, and W are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and Nu are as defined in Scheme G.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXVI under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XIV under amide coupling conditions, e.g. hydroxybenzoltriazole, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to afford a compound of formula XXXVII.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , L′, and W are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L is as defined in Scheme E.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXVII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. As needed, mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers of any compounds XXXVII may be resolved into their constituent enantiomers or diasteromers using techniques known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to preparative high performance liquid chromatography or preparative supercritical fluid chromatography.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula I under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to form a compound of formula XXXIV.

Herein, R 2 is H; L′-W together are H or form an optional substitution;

X, R 1 , R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1; Nu-H is a primary or secondary amine; L is an optional linker; Y is carboxylate, and PG is a suitable carboxylic acid protecting group including but not limited to methyl or ethyl. A compound of formula XXXVIII may then be converted to a compound of formula XXXIX under conditions suitable for the removal of PG, for example lithium hydroxide in water and a mixture of methanol and/or tetrahydrofuran when PG is methyl or ethyl. Finally, a compound of formula XXXIX may be reacted with a compound of formula VIII under conditions suitable for amide formation, e.g. hydroxybenzoltriazole, 1-ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide, and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide, to afford a compound of formula XXXIV. Herein Z is as defined in Scheme D.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XX under amide coupling conditions, e.g. 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide afford a compound of formula XXXVIII.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , L′, and W are as defined in Scheme 1; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L, Z, and R are as defined in Scheme F.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXVIII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. As needed, mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers of any compounds XXXVIII may be resolved into their constituent enantiomers or diasteromers using techniques known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to preparative high performance liquid chromatography or preparative supercritical fluid chromatography.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XI under conditions for a nucleophilic aromatic substitution reaction, e.g. diisopropylethylamine in isopropanol at 115° C. with microwave heating, to afford a compound of formula XXXIX.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1; L′ is absent; W is a suitable leaving group such as fluoride or chloride; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and Z are as defined in Scheme D. In cases where R 1 is an aryl or heteroaryl chloride, bromide, or iodide, a compound of formula XXXIX may be further transformed to a different compound of formula XXXIX, e.g. by reaction under Suzuki coupling conditions with an aryl boronic acid or ester, with catalytic (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropyl-1,1′-biphenyl)[2-(2′-amino-1,1′-biphenyl)]palladium(II) methanesulfonate, potassium phosphate in water and tetrahydrofuran at 60° C. In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXIX under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XL under conditions for a nucleophilic aromatic substitution reaction, e.g. sodium hydride in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature, to afford a compound of formula XLI.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1; L′ is absent; W is a suitable leaving group such as fluoride or chloride; L″ is a linker; and Y′ is either is either CH 2 OH or a terminal, suitably protected (e.g. t-butoxycarbonyl) primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring.

In cases of XLI where Y′ is CH 2 OH, it may be converted to its corresponding aldehyde under oxidative conditions, for example Swern or Dess-Martin oxidation, to afford a compound XLII wherein Y″ is CHO. In cases of XLI where Y′ is a terminal, suitably protected primary or secondary amine, it may be converted to the corresponding deprotected amine using suitable conditions, for example trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane at room temperature when the protecting group is t-butoxycarbonyl, to afford a compound XLII wherein Y″ is the amine of Y′ without its protecting group. A compound of formula XLII may then be treated with a compound of formula XI under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol, to afford a compound of formula XLIII. Herein, L and Z are as defined in Scheme D. In cases where Y″ in XLII is CHO, Y in XI is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and Y″ in XLIII becomes CH 2 . In cases where Y″ in XLII is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring, Y in XI is CHO; and Y in XLIII becomes CH 2 .

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XLIII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XXX may be reacted with a compound of formula IV under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol to afford a compound of formula XXXI.

Herein,

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L′ are as defined in Scheme 1; W is CHO; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and Nu, L, and Z are as defined in one of Schemes A, B, or C.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XLIV under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XIV under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol to afford a compound of formula XLV.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L′ are as defined in Scheme 1; W is CHO; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L is as defined in Scheme E.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XLV under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. As needed, mixtures of enantiomers or diastereomers of any compounds XLV may be resolved into their constituent enantiomers or diasteromers using techniques known to one skilled in the art, including but not limited to preparative high performance liquid chromatography or preparative supercritical fluid chromatography.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XXVI under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol to afford a compound of formula XLVI.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L′ are as defined in Scheme 1; W is CHO; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and IAP are as defined in one of Schemes H or I.

The t-butoxycarbonyl group contained in the structure of IAP may then be removed under suitable conditions, for example hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane or tifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane, to afford different compounds of formula XLVI where the structure of IAP is either:

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula XXIII under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol to afford a compound of formula XLVII.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L′ are as defined in Scheme 1; W is CHO; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; and L and Nu are as defined in Scheme G.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula XXXVII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XLVIII may be reacted with a compound of formula V to prepare a compound of formula XLIX. Herein LG may be a suitable leaving group such as tosylate, bromide, or iodide; L is an optional linker; Y is a primary or secondary amine, which may be optionally substituted or cyclized into a 4- to 8-membered heterocyclic ring; PG is a suitable protecting group, including but not limited to t-butoxycarbonyl; and PG′ is a suitable protecting group, including but not limited to 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methyl. PG and PG′ may then be removed simultaneously, using suitable conditions, such as hydrochloric acid in 1,4-dioxane, to afford a compound of formula L. A compound of formula L may then be reacted with a compound of formula XXX under reductive amination conditions, for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride and triethylamine in dichloromethane or sodium cyanoborohydride, sodium acetate, and acetic acid in dichloromethane and methanol to afford a compound of formula LI.

Herein,

X, R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L′ are as defined in Scheme 1; and W is CHO. In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LI under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula XXX may also be reacted with a compound of formula LII under conditions for a nucleophilic aromatic substitution reaction, e.g. sodium hydride in tetrahydrofuran at 20 to 50° C., to afford a compound of formula LIII. Herein, X and R 3 are as defined in Scheme 1;

is an optionally substituted aliphatic cyclic amine; R 1 is a suitable protecting group on the amine group of

for example t-butoxycarbonyl; R 2 is a suitable protecting group, for example benzyloxycarbonyl; L′ is absent; W is a suitable leaving group such as fluoride or chloride; L″ is a linker; and PG is a suitable alcohol protecting group, for example tetrahydropyranyl. A compound of formula LIII may be transformed to a compound of formula LIV under conditions suitable for the removal of certain protecting groups, for example trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 1 is t-butoxycarbonyl and PG is tetrahydropyranyl; in this case, R 1 of LIV becomes H. Such a compound of formula LIV may be transformed into a different compound of general formula LIV using conditions known to one skilled in the art. For example, by taking the compound LIV where R 1 is H and treating it with an aryl halide under conditions suitable for a Hartwig-Buchwald amination, e.g. (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-diisopropoxy-1,1′-biphenyl)[2-(2′-amino-1,1′-biphenyl)]palladium(II) methanesulfonate and cesium carbonate in 1,4-dioxane at 90° C., a compound of formula LIV is obtained wherein R 1 is e.g. phenyl, napthalene, or heteroaryl, which may be independently multiply substituted with OH, CN, alkyl, and/or halogen. Further transformations of a compound LIV into a different compound LIV may be derived, for example, by changing the identity of the group R 2 . For example, in the case where R 2 is benzyloxycarbonyl, it may be treated with e.g. H 2 , palladium on carbon in methanol to afford the compound LIV where R 2 is H. This compound of formula LIV where R 2 is H may be transformed e.g. by treatment with di-t-butyldicarbonate and triethylamine in dichloromethane to another compound of formula LIV where R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl; or e.g. by treatment with isocyanatotrimethylsilane and triethylamine in tetrahydrofuran to another compound of formula LIV where R 2 is C(O)NH 2 . A suitably substituted compound of formula LIV may be converted to a compound of formula LV, wherein PG is a suitable protecting group such as ethyl, by treatment with a reagent such as ethyl diazoacetate and a catalyst such as rhodium (II) acetate in dichloromethane. A compound of formula LV may be transformed to a compound of formula LVI using conditions suitable for ester hydrolysis, such as lithium hydroxide in water and tetrahydrofuran. Finally, a compound of formula LVI may be reacted with a compound of formula VIII under conditions suitable for amine coupling, e.g. N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to afford a compound of formula LVII. Herein Z is an optional substituent, e.g. H, methyl, or hydroxymethyl.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LVII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. Alternatively this compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LVII under conditions for a urea formation. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to isocyanato trimethylsilane and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LIV may be converted into a compound of formula LVIII by treatment with a suitable reagent such as p-toluenesulfonyl chloride, triethylamine, and N,N-dimethylaminopyridine in dichloromethane.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17; and LG is e.g. p-toluenesulfonate. A compound of formula LVIII may then be reacted with a compound of formula VIII under conditions suitable for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. potassium carbonate in N,N-dimethylformamide at 50° C. to afford a compound of formula LIX. Herein Z is C═O.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LIX under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. Alternatively this compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LIX under conditions for a urea formation. Representative conditions for such urea formations include, but are not limited to isocyanatotrimethylsilane and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LVIII may be converted to a compound of formula LX by treatment with a compound of formula XII under conditions suitable for an alkylation reaction, for example potassium carbonate in N,N-dimethylformamide at 80° C.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LX under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. Alternatively this compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LX under conditions for a urea formation. Representative conditions for such urea formations include, but are not limited to isocyanatotrimethylsilane and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LVIII may be converted to a compound of formula LXI by treatment with an ammonia equivalent such as phthalimide potassium salt in N,N-dimethylformamide at 80° C. followed by treatment with e.g. hydrazine hydrate in ethanol at 70° C.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17.

A compound of formula LXI may then be reacted with a compound of formula II under conditions suitable for nucleophilic aromatic substitution, e.g. diisopropylethylamine in dimethylsulfoxide at 90° C., to afford a compound of formula LXII. Herein Z is C═O.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane when R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. Alternatively this compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXII under conditions for a urea formation. Representative conditions for such urea formations include, but are not limited to isocyanatotrimethylsilane and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LVIII may be reacted with a compound of formula VI to prepare a compound of formula LXIII under conditions suitable for nucleophilic substitution, e.g. potassium carbonate in N,N-dimethylformamide at 80° C.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17; and Z is CH 2 .

A compound of formula LXIII may then be treated with a reagent to effect imide ring closure and concomitant removal of R 2 in cases where R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl, e.g. benzenesulfonic acid in acetonitrile at reflux. In cases where R 2 is t-butoxycarbonyl in LVIII, R 2 thus becomes H in LXIV. This compound LXIV where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXIV under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature. Alternatively this compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXIV under conditions for a urea formation. Representative conditions for such urea formations include, but are not limited to isocyanatotrimethylsilane and triethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LVIII may be converted to a compound of formula LXV by treatment with a compound of formula XXIV under conditions suitable for an alkylation reaction, for example potassium carbonate in acetonitrile at 80° C.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17; and IAP is either:

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as H 2 , palladium on carbon in methanol when R 2 is benzyloxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXVI under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

A compound of formula LXV may subsequently be converted to a compound of formula LXVI by treatment with reagents suitable for the removal of a t-butoxycarbonyl protecting group, for example trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane. Herein IAP′ is either:

A compound of formula LXI may alternatively be reacted with a compound of formula XXI under amide coupling conditions, e.g. N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N′-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide to afford a compound of formula LXVII.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17.

In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as H 2 , palladium on carbon in methanol when R 2 is benzyloxycarbonyl. This compound where R 2 is H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXVII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

Alternatively, a compound of formula LVIII may be converted to a compound of formula LXVIII by treatment with a compound of formula XLVIII under conditions suitable for an alkylation reaction, for example potassium carbonate in acetonitrile at 80° C.

Herein

R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and L″ are as defined for LIV in Scheme 17; and PG′ is as defined in Scheme 16. In cases where R 2 is a protecting group, the protecting group may be removed with suitable conditions, such as hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane; in cases where PG′ is 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl, PG′ becomes H under these conditions. This compound where PG′ and R 2 are H may then be converted to a different compound of formula LXVIII under conditions for an amide coupling. Representative conditions for such amide formations include, but are not limited to: acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane, −78° C.; or a carboxylic acid such as 2,2-dihydroxyacetic acid, and 1-[bis(dimethylamino)methylene]-1H-1,2,3-triazolo[4,5-b]pyridinium 3-oxid hexafluorophosphate and diisopropylethylamine in N,N-dimethylformamide at room temperature.

General Synthetic Scheme 1.

A compound of formula I (commercially available or readily prepared using standard reaction techniques known to one skilled in the art) may be reacted with a compound II under amide formation conditions, e.g. HOBt, EDCI, with a suitable base such as DIEA and a suitable solvent such as DMF to produce a compound of formula III. PG is a suitable protecting group, e.g. tert-butoxycarbonyl, R is H or an optional substituent, e.g. methyl, and Z is an optional substituent, e.g. H, methyl, or hydroxymethyl. A compound of formula III may be converted to a compound of formula IV using conditions suitable for the removal of a protecting group, e.g. hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane in dichloromethane when PG is tert-butoxycarbonyl. A compound of formula IV may then be reacted with a compound of formula V under amide coupling conditions, e.g. analogous to those used for the conversion of I and II to III, to produce a compound of formula VI. Compounds VI may then be converted to compounds VII under suitable protecting group removal conditions, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane. The compound VII may be converted to a compound of formula VIII under amide formation conditions, e.g. acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane.

General Synthetic Scheme 2.

A compound of formula IX may be reacted with a compound of formula X to provide compounds of formula XI, wherein X is a suitable leaving group such as fluorine or chlorine, PG is a suitable protecting group, e.g. tert-butoxycarbonyl, R is H or an optional substituent, e.g. methyl, and reaction conditions are those for a nucleophilic aromatic substitution, e.g. DIEA, DMSO, 80° C. A compound of formula XI may be converted to a compound of formula XII using conditions suitable for the removal of a protecting group, e.g. hydrogen chloride in 1,4-dioxane in dichloromethane when PG is tert-butoxycarbonyl. A compound of formula XI may then be reacted with a compound of formula V under amide coupling conditions, e.g. HOBt, EDCI, with a suitable base such as DIEA and a suitable solvent such as DMF, to produce a compound of formula XIII Compound XIII may then be converted to compound XIV under suitable protecting group removal conditions, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid in dichloromethane. The compound XIV may be converted to a compound of formula XV under amide formation conditions, e.g. acryloyl chloride, 2,6-lutidine, dichloromethane.

Exemplary Synthesis of 2-(2,6-dioxopiperidin-3-yl)-5-hydroxyisoindoline-1,3-dione

A solution of 3-aminopiperidine-2,6-dione (4.1 g, 24.7 mmol, 1.50 eq, HCl salt) in acetic acid (45 mL) was charged with sodium acetate (4.1 g, 49.4 mmol, 3.00 eq), then the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. Then 4-hydroxyphthalic acid (3.0 g, 16.5 mmol, 1.00 eq) was added into the mixture and heated to 120° C., stirred for additional 11 hours. The mixture was concentrated and then poured into water (20 mL), and then filtered. The crude product was purified by column chromatography (dichloromethane:methanol=50:1 to 10:1) to afford 2-(2,6-dioxo-3-piperidyl)-5-hydroxy-isoindoline-1,3-dione (3.9 g, 14.3 mmol, 86% yield) as a colorless solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 275 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 11.19-10.94 (m, 2H), 7.75 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.08 (m, 2H), 5.08 (dd, J=5.2, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 3.34 (br s, 1H), 2.95-2.81 (m, 1H), 2.64-2.55 (m, 1H), 2.08-1.98 (m, 1H).

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 250-mL round-bottom flask, was placed (1S)-1-(4-bromophenyl)ethan-1-amine (10.0 g, 49.98 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in dichloromethane (100 mL), triethylamine (10.0 g, 99.01 mmol, 2.00 equiv), di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (13.0 g, 59.63 mmol, 1.20 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (1:10). This resulted in 15.0 g of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-1-(4-bromophenyl)ethyl]carbamate as a white solid.

Into a 250-mL round-bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen, was placed a solution of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-1-(4-bromophenyl)ethyl]carbamate (15.0 g, 49.97 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in N,N-Dimethylacetamide (100 mL), 4-methyl-1,3-thiazole (9.9 g, 99.84 mmol, 2.00 equiv), potassium acetate (9.8 g, 99.86 mmol, 2.00 equiv), palladium(II) acetate (112.5 mg, 0.50 mmol, 0.01 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at 120° C. The reaction mixture was quenched by the addition of water (500 mL). The resulting solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL×3) and the organic layers combined and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (1:5). This resulted in 7.5 g (47%) of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamate as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 319.13 [M+Na] + .

Into a 100-mL round-bottom flask, was placed a solution of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamate (7.5 g, 23.55 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in methanol (20 mL), hydrogen chloride (gas) was bubbled in at room temperature. The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. This resulted in 4.4 g (86%) of (1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethan-1-amine as a white solid.

Step 4: Preparation of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

Into a 100-mL round-bottom flask, was placed (2S,4R)-1-[(tert-butoxy)carbonyl]-4-hydroxypyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (4.7 g, 20.32 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL), N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (7.8 g, 60.35 mmol, 3.00 equiv), o-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-te-tramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (11.5 g, 30.26 mmol, 1.50 equiv), (1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethan-1-amine (4.4 g, 20.15 mmol, 1.00 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred for 12 hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched by the addition of water (20 mL). The resulting solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL×3) and the organic layers combined and dried in an oven under reduced pressure, concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (1:1). This resulted in 5.0 g (57%) of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 432.15 [M+1] + .

Step 5: Preparation of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 500-mL round-bottom flask, was placed a solution of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (5.0 g, 11.59 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in methanol (200 mL), then hydrogen chloride (gas) was bubbled into the reaction mixture for 2 hours at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. This resulted in 3.2 g (83%) of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide as a red solid.

Step 6: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)carbamate

Into a 25-mL round-bottom flask, was placed (2S)-2-[(tert-butoxy)carbonyl]amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoic acid (2.0 g, 8.65 mmol, 0.99 equiv) in N,N-dimethylformamide (30 mL). N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (3.4 g, 3.00 equiv), o-(7-Azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-te-tramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (5.0 g, 1.50 equiv), (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride (3.2 g, 8.70 mmol, 1.00 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred for 12 hours at room temperature. The resulting solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (60 mL×3) and washed with water (100 mL×2). The organic layers combined and dried, concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (1:3). This resulted in 4.0 g (84%) of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl]carbamate as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 545.30 [M+1] + .

Step 7: Preparation of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 100-mL round-bottom flask, was placed a solution of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl]carbamate (4.0 g, 7.34 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in methanol (30 mL), then hydrogen chloride (gas) was bubbled into the reaction mixture for 2 hours at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. This resulted in 3.5 g of (2S,4R)-1-[(2S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl]-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 445.05 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 8.99 (s, 1H), 8.57-8.55 (d, J=7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.01 (b, 3H), 7.46-7.43 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.39-7.37 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.98-4.90 (m, 1H), 4.57-4.51 (m, 1H), 4.34 (b, 1H), 3.94-3.92 (m, 1H), 3.69-3.66 (m, 1H), 3.53-3.49 (m, 1H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.10-2.07 (m, 1H), 1.83-1.81 (m, 1H), 1.40-1.30 (m, 3H), 1.03 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 3-((4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of 2-amino-4-bromo-3-fluorobenzoic acid (9.0 g, 38.5 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (180 mL) was added N-Chlorosuccinimide (6.2 g, 46.2 mmol) and stirred at 70° C. overnight. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into water (100 mL). The precipitate was collected through filtration, and the filter cake was washed with water and dried in vacuo to afford 2-amino-4-bromo-5-chloro-3-fluorobenzoic acid (9.0 g, 87%) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 268.0 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 6.90 (br, 2H), 7.69 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H).

A mixture 2-amino-4-bromo-5-chloro-3-fluorobenzoic acid (2.0 g, 7.5 mmol) and urea (2.2 g, 37.3 mmol) was mixed uniformly at room temperature and stirred at 240° C. for 2 hours. After cooling to 100° C., water (30 mL) was added to and the resulting mixture was stirred at 100° C. for 30 minutes. The precipitate was collected through filtration, and the filter cake was washed with boiling water three times and dried in vacuo to afford 7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazoline-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (2.1 g, 95%) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 293.6 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 7.82 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 11.65 (br, 2H).

To a suspension of 7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazoline-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (500 mg, 1.7 mmol) in phosphorus oxychloride (7.5 mL) was added N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (550 mg, 4.3 mmol) and refluxed overnight. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure to give a residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (2% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford 7-bromo-2,4,6-trichloro-8-fluoroquinazoline (400 mg, 71%) as a yellow solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.21 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H).

Step 4: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-2,6-dichloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of 7-bromo-2,4,6-trichloro-8-fluoroquinazoline (400 mg, 1.2 mmol) and triethylamine (364 mg, 3.6 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (6 mL) was added tert-butyl piperazine-1-carboxylate (236 mg, 1.27 mmol) at room temperature and stirred at 50° C. for 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (15 mL) and extracted with dichloromethane (10 mL×2). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 3%-30% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-2,6-dichloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (520 mg, 90%) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 479.0/481.0 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.50 (s, 9H), 3.69-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.94-3.85 (m, 4H), 7.77 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H).

Step 5: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-2,6-dichloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl) piperazine-1-carboxylate (100 mg, 0.2 mmol) in isopropanol (3 mL) were added ethyl 3-aminopropanoate hydrochloride (91.8 mg, 0.6 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (78 mg, 0.6 mmol) and refluxed for 20 hours. The reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and water (10 ml). The organic layer was collected, and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (15 ml×2). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 10%-50% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoroquin azolin-4-yl) piperazine-1-carboxylate (95 mg, 81%) as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.27 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.49 (s, 9H), 2.60-2.70 (m, 2H), 3.55-3.70 (m, 8H), 3.84-3.75 (m, 2H), 4.16 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 5.67 (br, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H).

Step 6: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (820 mg, 1.46 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (16.5 mL) and water (4 mL) were added 2-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalene-1-yl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (550 mg, 1.75 mmol), sodium carbonate (387 mg, 3.65 mmol) and 1,1′-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene palladium(II)dichloride (110 mg, 0.15 mmol) at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere; the mixture was degassed with nitrogen three times. The resulting mixture was refluxed for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (30 ml) and water (20 ml); the organic layer was collected and the aqueous layer was extracted with ethyl acetate (20 ml×2). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (40 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 10-33% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxy methoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (940 mg, 78%) as a white foam. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 668.4 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.26 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.51 (s, 9H), 2.67 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.55 (s, 3H), 3.62-3.75 (m, 8H), 3.79-3.83 (m, 2H), 4.16 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 5.38-5.29 (m, 2H), 5.57-5.65 (m, 1H), 7.19 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.26 (m, 1H), 7.37 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.42 (m, 1H), 7.52 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=1.4 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H).

Step 7: Preparation of ethyl 3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate hydrochloride

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-2-((3-ethoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (940 mg, 1.4 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) was added hydrogen chloride in dioxane (10 mL, 4 M) at room temperature and stirred overnight. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure to give ethyl 3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl) quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate hydrochloride (1.4 mmol). LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 524.4 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of ethyl 3-((7-(3-acetoxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate

To a suspension of ethyl 3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate hydrochloride (1.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (30 mL) were added triethylamine (850 mg, 8.4 mmol) and acetyl chloride (328 mg, 4.2 mmol) at room temperature and stirred 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give residue which was purified by silica gel column (eluted with 2% methanol in dichloromethane) to afford ethyl 3-((7-(3-acetoxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate (735 mg, two steps yield 86%) as light yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 608.7 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.26 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 2.67 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H), 3.66-3.88 (m, 10H), 4.17 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 5.64 (t, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.36 (m, 1H), 7.45 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.53 (m, 1H), 7.66 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.73 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H).

Step 9: Preparation of 3-((4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of ethyl 3-((7-(3-acetoxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate (735 mg, 1.2 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (6 ml)-water (2 ml) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (241 mg, 6.0 mmol) at room temperature and stirred for 2 hours. The mixture solution was cooled to room temperature, acidified with diluted hydrochloride acid (3N) till pH 3-4, and extracted with dichloromethane (10 ml×2). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (10 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 3-((4-(4-acetylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid as a white solid (470 mg, 78%). LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 538.3 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 2.07 (s, 3H), 2.55-2.65 (m, 2H), 3.45-3.85 (m, 8H), 4.19-3.88 (m, 2H), 7.07 (s, 1H), 7.17-7.35 (m, 3H), 7.53-7.38 (m, 1H), 7.70-8.10 (m, 2H), 10.22-9.94 (m, 1H), 12.33 (br, 1H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

Step 1: Preparation of ethyl 3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate

To a solution of ethyl 3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate hydrochloride (630 mg, 1.12 mmol) and triethylamine (341 mg, 3.36 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 ml) was added acryloyl chloride (166 mg, 1.68 mmol) at 0° C., stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was quenched with water (20 ml) at 0° C., and extracted with dichloromethane (20 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (20 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 2-5% methanol in dichloromethane) to afford ethyl 3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate (425 mg, 66%) as off-white solid.

Step 2: Preparation of 3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

A mixture of ethyl3-((4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate ethyl 3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate (425 mg, 0.75 mmol) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (63 mg, 1.5 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (4 ml)-water (1 ml)-methanol (1 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was acidified with diluted hydrochloride acid (1N) to pH 6-7, and extracted with dichloromethane (10 ml×3). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 3-((4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (400 mg, 99%) as light yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 550.1 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11-trioxa-5-azatridecan-13-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate

To a mixture of 2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethanol (5.00 g, 33.29 mmol, 1.00 eq) and 4-methylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.59 g, 8.32 mmol, 0.25 eq) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added triethylamine (1.68 g, 16.65 mmol, 2.3 mL, 0.5 eq) in one portion at 25° C. under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was washed with brine (30 mL×2), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=1/1 to 0:1) to afford 2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.72 g, 5.65 mmol, 17% yield) as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 327.0 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.81 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.35 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.22-4.15 (m, 2H), 3.79-3.67 (m, 4H), 3.67-3.56 (m, 6H), 2.46 (s, 3H).

Methanamine (41.27 g, 398.65 mmol, 50 mL, 30% in ethanol, 24.27 eq) was added to 2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (5 g, 16.43 mmol, 1 eq). The mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was cooled to 20° C. and concentrated in vacuum. 2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol (2.68 g, 16.43 mmol) was obtained as a colorless oil.

To a solution of 2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol (2.68 g, 16.43 mmol, 1 eq) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.30 g, 19.70 mmol, 4.5 mL, 1.2 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added triethylamine (3.32 g, 32.84 mmol, 4.5 mL, 2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was quenched by the addition of water (20 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (20 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=3/1 to 1/3) to give tert-butyl N-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (3.2 g, 12.15 mmol, 74% yield) as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.70-3.80 (m, 2H), 3.54-3.70 (m, 8H), 3.41 (br s, 2H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H).

Step 4: Preparation of 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11-trioxa-5-azatridecan-13-yl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate

To a solution of tert-butyl N-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (600 mg, 2.28 mmol, 1 eq) and triethylamine (461 mg, 4.56 mmol, 0.6 mL, 2 eq) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (651 mg, 3.42 mmol, 1.5 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL). The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (20 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=10/1 to 3/1) to give 2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (750 mg, 1.80 mmol, 79% yield) as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 440.1 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.81 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.35 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.19-4.15 (m, 2H), 3.70 (t, J=4.8 Hz, 2H), 3.61-3.51 (m, 6H), 3.38 (br s, 2H), 2.90 (s, 3H), 2.46 (s, 3H), 1.45 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 2-(2,6-dioxopiperidin-3-yl)-4-fluoroisoindoline-1,3-dione

To a mixture of 3-aminopiperidine-2,6-dione (10.90 g, 66.22 mmol, 1.1 eq, hydrochloride) and 4-fluoroisobenzofuran-1,3-dione (10 g, 60.20 mmol, 1 eq) in acetic acid (150 mL) was added potassium acetate (18.32 g, 186.63 mmol, 3.1 eq) in one portion at 100° C. under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 100° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was cooled to 20° C. and concentrated under reduced pressure at 55° C. The residue was triturated with Ethyl acetate (100 mL) and water (30 mL), the cake was collected under reduced pressure and dried under high vacuo. Compound 2-(2,6-dioxo-3-piperidyl)-4-fluoro-isoindoline-1,3-dione (8.9 g, 32.22 mmol, 53% yield) was obtained as a black solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 11.15 (br s, 1H), 7.95 (dt, J=4.6, 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.82-7.70 (m, 2H), 5.17 (dd, J=5.3, 12.9 Hz, 1H), 2.99-2.81 (m, 1H), 2.66-2.52 (m, 2H), 2.13-2.02 (m, 1H).

Exemplary Synthesis of (S)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of (2-fluoro-6-methoxy-phenyl)boronic acid (10 g, 58.84 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was added boron tribromide (44 g, 176.52 mmol, 3.0 eq) at 0° C. Then the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 0.5 hour. The mixture was diluted with ice water (100 mL) at 0° C., extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL×3), washed with brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was added 2,3-dimethylbutane-2,3-diol (13.91 g, 117.68 mmol, 2 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. Then the mixture was concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (petroleum ether). 3-fluoro-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenol (6 g, 25.20 mmol, 42% yield) was obtained as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.36-7.28 (m, 1H), 6.69 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.57 (t, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 1.40 (s, 12H).

Step 2: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoro-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a mixture of methyl 3-aminopropanoate (16.57 g, 118.71 mmol, 3 eq, hydrochloride) and tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-2,6-dichloro-8-fluoro-quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (19 g, 39.57 mmol, 1 eq) in isopropanol (600 mL) was added N,N-diisopropylethylamine (25.57 g, 197.85 mmol, 34.46 mL, 5 eq) in one portion at 20° C. under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 95° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was cooled to 20° C. and concentrated under reduced pressure at 45° C. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=10/1, 3/1) to afford tert-butyl4-[7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoro-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (10.6 g, 19.38 mmol, 49% yield) as yellow solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.65-7.32 (m, 1H), 3.64-3.52 (m, 10H), 3.34 (s, 3H), 2.66 (br d, J=9.2 Hz, 2H), 1.43 (s, 9H).

Step 3: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-[7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoro-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (6.8 g, 12.44 mmol, 1 eq) and 3-fluoro-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenol (7.43 g, 31.21 mmol, 2.51 eq) in toluene (140 mL) was added [2-(2-aminophenyl)phenyl]-chloro-palladium; dicyclohexyl-[2-(2,6-dimethoxyphenyl)phenyl]phosphane (448 mg, 0.62 mmol, 0.05 eq) and potassium phosphate (1.5 M, 24.87 mL, 3 eq). The reaction mixture was degassed and charged with nitrogen for three times and then stirred at 75° C. for 30 hours. Ethyl acetate (80 mL) and water (100 mL) were added and the mixture was separated. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get the residue. The residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (0-100% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to get tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (4.2 g, 6.90 mmol, 55% yield, 95% purity) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 578.2 [M+1] + .

Step 4: Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate and tert-butyl (R)-4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

Tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (5 g, 8.65 mmol, 1 eq) was separated by SFC. Tert-butyl (S)-4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (2.38 g, 3.85 mmol, 89% yield, 93% purity) was obtained as a yellow solid. Tert-butyl (R)-4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-2-((3-methoxy-3-oxopropyl)amino)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (2.5 g, 4.15 mmol, 96% yield, 96% purity) was obtained as a yellow solid.

Step 5: Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (2.38 g, 3.83 mmol, 1 eq) in mixture of tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and methanol (12 mL) was added water (12 mL) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (450 mg, 10.73 mmol, 2.80 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 16 hours. The pH of the water layer was adjusted to 6 with the addition of 1 N hydrochloric acid. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (70 mL×2). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get (S)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (2.02 g, 3.58 mmol, 93% yield) as a yellow solid.

Exemplary Synthesis of (R)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

Step 1: Preparation of (R)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-2-[(3-methoxy-3-oxo-propyl)amino]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (2.5 g, 4.15 mmol, 1 eq) in a mixture of tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and methanol (12 mL) were added water (12 mL) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (488 mg, 11.63 mmol, 2.80 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 16 hours. The pH of the mixture was adjusted to 6 with the addition of 1 N hydrochloric acid. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (80 mL×2). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get (R)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (2.24 g, 3.97 mmol, 95% yield) as a yellow solid.

Exemplary Synthesis of (S)-3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

Step 1: Preparation of (S)-3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of (S)-3-((4-(4-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (1.0 g, 1.77 mmol, 1 eq) in dioxane (10 mL) was added hydrogen chloride/dioxane (4 M, 30.00 mL, 67.68 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give the product (S)-3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (0.88 g, 1.76 mmol, 99% yield, hydrochloride) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 464.0 [M+1] + .

Step 2: Preparation of (S)-3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of (S)-3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (0.88 g, 1.76 mmol, 1 eq, hydrochloride) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (20 mL) in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) was added acryloyl chloride (159 mg, 1.76 mmol, 143.24 uL, 9.98e-1 eq). The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 0.5 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to remove solvent to give a residue. The residue was purified by prep-HPLC. Compound (S)-3-((4-(4-acryloylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid (0.52 g, 1.00 mmol, 57% yield) was obtained as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CD 3 OD) δ 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.33-7.25 (m, 1H), 6.86-6.66 (m, 3H), 6.26 (dd, J=2.0, 16.8 Hz, 1H), 5.80 (dd, J=2.0, 10.8 Hz, 1H), 3.88 (br s, 8H), 3.74 (br t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.63 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H).

Exemplary Synthesis of (S)-3-((4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

Step 1: Preparation of methyl (S)-3-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate hydrochloride

To a solution of 3-[[4-(4-tert-butoxycarbonylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoic acid (1.5 g, 2.66 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (5 mL) was added hydrochloric acid in methanol (4 M, 10 mL). The mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give compound methyl 3-[[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-4-piperazin-1-yl-quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoate (1.35 g, hydrochloride) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 478.2 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 10.63 (brs, 1H), 9.92 (brs, 2H), 8.77-8.43 (m, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.38 (q, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.87-6.72 (m, 1H), 4.42-4.15 (m, 4H), 3.86-3.51 (m, 5H), 3.36-3.26 (m, 4H), 2.71-2.55 (m, 2H).

Step 2: Preparation of methyl (S)-3-((4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoate

To a solution of methyl 3-[[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)-4-piperazin-1-yl-quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoate (1.35 g, 2.62 mmol, 1 eq, hydrochloride) and triethylamine (266 mg, 2.62 mmol, 1 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) and tetrahydrofuran (5 mL) was added isocyanato(trimethyl)silane (302 mg, 2.62 mmol, 1 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 0.5 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give compound methyl 3-[[4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoate (1.37 g) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 521.2 [M+1] + .

Step 3: Preparation of (S)-3-((4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxyphenyl)quinazolin-2-yl)amino)propanoic acid

To a solution of methyl 3-[[4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoate (1.37 g, 2.63 mmol, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and water (3 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (276 mg, 6.57 mmol, 2.5 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 0.5 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was diluted with water (10 mL), acidified to pH=3 with hydrochloric acid (1 M), some precipitate was formed while the addition of hydrochloric acid. The resulting mixture was filtered and the filter cake was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure to give compound 3-[[4-(4-carbamoylpiperazin-1-yl)-6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(2-fluoro-6-hydroxy-phenyl)quinazolin-2-yl]amino]propanoic acid (1.2 g, 2.37 mmol, 90% yield) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 507.2 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 12.41 (brs, 1H), 10.57-10.08 (m, 1H), 8.19-7.94 (m, 1H), 7.93-7.64 (m, 1H), 7.44-7.26 (m, 1H), 6.98-6.73 (m, 2H), 6.11 (brs, 2H), 4.19-3.91 (m, 2H), 3.77-3.46 (m, 4H), 3.43-3.36 (m, 4H), 2.58 (t, J=6.4 Hz, 2H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-7-yl)naphthalen-2-ol hydrochloride

A mixture of 2-amino-4-bromo-5-chloro-3-fluorobenzoic acid (1.5 g, 5.58 mmol) and formimidamide acetate (2.3 g, 22.35 mmol) in ethanol (30 ml) was stirred at refluxed for 24 hours. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was partitioned with water (20 ml) and ethyl acetate (20 ml). The organic layer was washed with brine (10 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4(3H)-one (1.2 g, 77%) as light yellow solid.

To a solution of 7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4(3H)-one (1.2 g, 4.3 mmol) in sulfurous dichloride (16 ml) was added N,N-dimethylformamide (1 ml) at room temperature. The mixture was stirred at refluxed for 16 hours. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was dissolved in dichloromethane (20 ml). The organic layer was poured into ice water (20 ml), washed with aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate (1N, 10 ml) and brine (10 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 5% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford 7-bromo-4,6-dichloro-8-fluoroquinazoline (1.07 g, 83%) as yellow solid.

Step 3: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

A mixture of 7-bromo-4,6-dichloro-8-fluoroquinazoline (1.07 g, 3.61 mmol), tert-butyl piperazine-1-carboxylate (674 mg, 3.61 mmol) and triethylamine (1.1 g, 10.85 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (11 ml) was stirred at 50° C. for 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was partitioned between ethyl acetate (15 ml) and water (20 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (10 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20-25% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (1 g, 62%) as white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.50 (s, 9H), 3.65, 3.80 (two singles, 8H), 7.79 (s, 1H), 8.77 (s, 1H).

Step 4: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a suspension of tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (1 g, 2.24 mmol), 2-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)-4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (705 mg, 2.24 mmol) and potassium carbonate (624 mg, 4.48 mmol) in dioxane (8 ml)-water (2 ml) was added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(O) (520 mg, 0.45 mmol) at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere; the mixture was degassed and refilled with nitrogen three times. The resulting mixture was refluxed for 12 hours. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was partitioned with water (10 ml) and ethyl acetate (10 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (10 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 18-33% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (420 mg, 34%) as light yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 553.20 [M+1] + .

Step 5: Preparation of 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-7-yl)naphthalen-2-ol hydrochloride

To a solution of tert-butyl4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-(methoxymethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (200 mg, 0.36 mmol) in methanol (2 ml) was added dioxane hydrochloric acid solution (2 ml) at room temperature. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated and the solid was washed with ethyl acetate (5 ml). The solid was collected and dried to afford 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-7-yl)naphthalen-2-ol hydrochloride (190 mg). LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 409.10 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-15-(tert-butyl)-13-oxo-5,8,11-trioxa-2,14-diazahexadecan-16-oyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate (600 mg, 2.28 mmol), tetrabutyl ammonium chloride (635 mg, 2.38 mmol), tert-butyl 2-bromoacetate (445 mg, 2.28 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (12 ml, 35% in water)dichloromethane (12 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 4 hours. The organic phase was collected, and the aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane (10 ml×2). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (20 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 10-20% ethyl acetate in cyclohexane) to afford tert-butyl 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11,14-tetraoxa-5-azahexadecan-16-oate (300 mg, 35%) as colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 1.45, 1.47 (two singles, 18H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 3.32-3.46 (m, 2H), 3.58-3.73 (m, 10H), 4.02 (s, 2H).

A mixture of tert-butyl 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11,14-tetraoxa-5-azahexadecan-16-oate (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) and lithium hydroxide monohydrate (23 mg, 0.53 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (1 ml)-water (0.5 ml)-methanol (0.5 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated and the residue was acidified with aqueous hydrochloride acid (1N) till pH 4-5, and extracted with dichloromethane (10 ml). The organic layer was washed with brine (5 ml), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11,14-tetraoxa-5-azahexadecan-16-oic acid (77 mg, 90%) as colorless oil.

Step 3: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-13-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-14,14-dimethyl-11-oxo-3,6,9-trioxa-12-azapentadecyl)(methyl)carbamate

To a solution of 2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11,14-tetraoxa-5-azahexadecan-16-oic acid (77 mg, 0.24 mmol), (2S,4R)-1-((S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride (115 mg, 0.24 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (124 mg, 0.96 mmol) in dry N,N-dimethylformamide (2 ml) was added HATU (2-(7-Aza-1H-benzotriazole-1-yl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate) (182 mg, 0.48 mmol) at 0° C., the resulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at room temperature for 10 minutes. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (20 ml) and water (20 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (20 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (eluted with 5% methanol in dichloromethane) to afford tert-butyl ((S)-13-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-14,14-dimethyl-11-oxo-3,6,9-trioxa-12-azapentadecyl)(methyl)carbamate (140 mg, 78%) as light yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 748.40 [M+1] + .

Step 4: Preparation of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-15-(tert-butyl)-13-oxo-5,8,11-trioxa-2,14-diazahexadecan-16-oyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of tert-butyl ((S)-13-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-14,14-dimethyl-11-oxo-3,6,9-trioxa-12-azapentadecyl)(methyl)carbamate (70 mg, 0.093 mmol) in dichloromethane (1 ml) was added 2,2,2-trifluoroacetic acid (0.5 ml) at room temperature. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford (2S,4R)-1-((S)-15-(tert-butyl)-13-oxo-5,8,11-trioxa-2,14-diazahexadecan-16-oyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (70 mg) as light yellow oil.

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-18-(tert-butyl)-16-oxo-5,8,11,14-tetraoxa-2,17-diazanonadecan-19-oyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a mixture of 2-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol (5 g, 25.74 mmol, 4.4 mL, 1 eq) and 4-methylbenzenesulfonyl chloride (1.23 g, 6.44 mmol, 0.25 eq) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added triethylamine (1.30 g, 12.87 mmol, 1.8 mL, 0.5 eq) in one portion at 25° C. under nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was washed with brine (30 mL×2), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=1/1 to 0/1) to afford 2-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.98 g, 5.68 mmol, 22% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 371.0 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.82 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.36 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 4.21-4.11 (m, 2H), 3.75-3.61 (m, 14H), 2.47 (s, 3H).

A solution of 2-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (6 g, 17.22 mmol, 1 eq) in methanamine (16.21 g, 172.21 mmol, 33% purity, 10 eq) was stirred at 80° C. for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum to give a residue. 2-[2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol (4.6 g) was obtained as a light yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.77 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.17 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 3.84-3.71 (m, 4H), 3.69-3.60 (m, 10H), 3.21-3.09 (m, 2H), 2.82-2.63 (m, 3H).

To a solution of 2-[2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol (3.86 g, 18.62 mmol, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (30 mL) was added di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (4.88 g, 22.35 mmol, 5.13 mL, 1.2 eq) at 0° C., then stirred at 15° C. for 16 hours. Triethylamine (3.77 g, 37.25 mmol, 5.18 mL, 2 eq) was added and then stirred at 15° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum to give a residue. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=5/1 to 1/3) to give tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (5.74 g) was obtained as a light yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.75-3.47 (m, 14H), 3.38 (br s, 2H), 2.90 (s, 3H), 1.44 (s, 9H).

To a mixture of tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (1 g, 3.25 mmol, 1 eq) and diacetoxyrhodium (143 mg, 0.32 mmol, 0.1 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added ethyl 2-diazoacetate (2.47 g, 19.50 mmol, 2.27 mL, 90% purity, 6 eq) in three portions dropwise at −5 to 0° C. Then the reaction mixture was stirred at 10° C. for 16 hours. Acetic acid (0.4 mL) was added to the reaction mixture. Then the reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (30 mL×3), and concentrated under vacuum to give a residue. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=20/1 to 1/3). ethyl 2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]acetate (600 mg, 1.52 mmol, 46% yield) was obtained as a green oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 4.21 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 4.15 (s, 2H), 3.75-3.67 (m, 4H), 3.66 (s, 4H), 3.64-3.51 (m, 6H), 3.39 (br s, 2H), 2.91 (s, 3H), 1.50-1.39 (m, 9H), 1.31-1.26 (m, 3H).

To a solution of ethyl 2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]acetate (600 mg, 1.52 mmol, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (5 mL), water (5 mL) and methanol (5 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (365 mg, 15.25 mmol, 10 eq), then the mixture was stirred at 15° C. for 4 hours. 1 M hydrogen chloride aqueous solution was added to the mixture until pH 3.0-4.0, then extracted with dichloromethane (30 mL×3), then the combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. 2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]acetic acid (473 mg, 1.29 mmol, 84% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 4.16 (s, 2H), 3.80-3.74 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.57 (m, 12H), 3.41 (br s, 2H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H).

Step 6: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-16-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl)-17,17-dimethyl-14-oxo-3,6,9,12-tetraoxa-15-azaoctadecyl)(methyl)carbamate

To a solution of 2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]acetic acid (250 mg, 0.68 mmol, 1 eq), (2S,4R)-1-[(2S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethyl-butanoyl]-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (304 mg, 0.68 mmol, 1 eq) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (265 mg, 2.05 mmol, 0.36 mL, 3 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (5 mL) was added hydroxybenzotriazole (111 mg, 0.82 umol, 1.2 eq) and 3-(ethyliminomethyleneamino)-N,N-dimethyl-propan-1-amine; hydrochloride (157 mg, 0.82 mmol, 1.2 eq) sequentially at 0° C., then stirred at 15° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into water (30 mL) and then extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (10 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-TLC (dichloromethane/methanol=10/1). tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[[(1S)-1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl]-2,2-dimethyl-propyl]amino]-2-oxo-ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (405 mg, 0.51 mmol, 74% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.43 (d, J=7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.46-7.41 (m, 2H), 7.37 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 3H), 5.12 (d, J=3.5 Hz, 1H), 4.91 (q, J=6.9 Hz, 1H), 4.54 (d, J=9.7 Hz, 1H), 4.44 (t, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 4.28 (br s, 1H), 3.63-3.47 (m, 15H), 3.30-3.26 (m, 2H), 3.17 (s, 3H), 2.80 (br d, J=4.4 Hz, 3H), 2.45 (s, 3H), 1.77 (ddd, J=4.5, 8.5, 12.9 Hz, 1H), 1.43-1.35 (m, 12H), 0.94 (s, 9H).

Step 7: Preparation of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-1-((S)-18-(tert-butyl)-16-oxo-5,8,11,14-tetraoxa-2,17-diazanonadecan-19-oyl)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[2-[2-[[(1S)-1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl]-2,2-dimethyl-propyl]amino]-2-oxo-ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (120 mg, 0.15 mmol, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (4 mL) was added hydrochloride/dioxane (4 M, 4 mL, 105.60 eq), then stirred at 15° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum to give (2S,4R)-1-[(2S)-3,3-dimethyl-2-[[2-[2-[2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]acetyl]amino]butanoyl]-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (120 mg, hydrochloride) was obtained as a colorless oil.

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)-4-hydroxy-N-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 1-L round-bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen, was placed a solution of 4-bromobenzonitrile (20 g, 109.88 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in DMA (250 mL), 4-methyl-1,3-thiazole (21.88 g, 220.67 mmol, 2.00 equiv), Pd(OAc) 2 (743 mg, 3.31 mmol, 0.03 equiv) and KOAc (21.66 g, 220.71 mmol, 2.00 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred for 5 hours at 150° C. The reaction mixture was cooled with a water/ice bath and diluted with 1 L of water. The resulting solution was extracted with 3×300 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were washed with 3×300 mL of water and 1×300 mL of brine, then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified on combi-flash with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (1:100-1:5). This resulted in 20 g (91%) of 4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)benzonitrile as a beige solid.

Into a 3-L 3-necked round-bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen, was placed 4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)benzonitrile (35 g, 174.77 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in tetrahydrofuran (1000 mL). This was followed by the addition of LiAlH 4 (20 g, 526.32 mmol, 3.00 equiv) in portions at 0° C. in 10 minutes. The resulting solution was stirred for 3 hours at 60° C. in an oil bath. The reaction was cooled to 0° C. with a water/ice bath, then quenched by the addition of 20 mL of water, 20 mL of NaOH (15%) and 60 mL of water. The resulting solution was diluted with 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The solids were filtered out. The filtrate was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with dichloromethane/methanol (10:1). This resulted in 20 g (56%) of [4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methanamine as yellow oil.

Step 3: Preparation of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-((4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

Into a 50-mL round-bottom flask, was placed (2S,4R)-1-[(tert-butoxy)carbonyl]-4-hydroxypyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (2.7 g, 11.68 mmol, 1.20 equiv) in N,N-dimethylformamide (30 mL), DIEA (2.52 g, 19.50 mmol, 1.20 equiv), HATU (4.47 g, 11.76 mmol, 1.20 equiv), [4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methanamine (2 g, 9.79 mmol, 1.00 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred overnight at 25° C. The reaction was then quenched by the addition of 20 mL of water and extracted with 3×20 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic layers combined, dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with dichloromethane/methanol (20:1). This resulted in 1 g (24%) of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-([[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate as a yellow solid.

Step 4: Preparation of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 1000-mL round-bottom flask, was placed tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-([[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (45 g, 107.78 mmol, 1.00 equiv), a solution of hydrogen chloride (13.44 L) in dioxane (300 mL). The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at 20° C. The solids were collected by filtration. This resulted in 37.3 g (98%) of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride as a yellow solid.

Step 5: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-((4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)carbamate

Into a 1000-mL round-bottom flask, was placed (2S)-2-[[(tert-butoxy)carbonyl]amino]-3,3-dimethylbutanoic acid (15.73 g, 68.01 mmol, 1.20 equiv) in N,N-dimethylformamide (500 mL), DIEA (29.2 g, 225.94 mmol, 4.00 equiv), HATU (25.9 g, 68.12 mmol, 1.20 equiv) and (2S,4R)-2-amino-5-chloro-4-hydroxy-N-[[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]pentanamide (20 g, 56.52 mmol, 1.00 equiv). The resulting solution was stirred 16 hours at 20° C. The reaction was then quenched by the addition of 200 mL of water and extracted with 3×100 mL of ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum. The residue was applied onto a silica gel column with ethyl acetate/petroleum ether (2:1). This resulted in 15.2 g (51%) of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-([[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl]-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl]carbamate as a yellow solid.

Step 6: Preparation of (2S,4R)-1-((S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl)-4-hydroxy-N-(4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

Into a 500-mL round-bottom flask, was placed tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-([[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl]-3,3-dimethyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl]carbamate (12 g, 22.61 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in dioxane (20 mL) and a solution of hydrogen chloride (3.584 L) in dioxane (80 mL). The resulting solution was stirred for 2 hours at 25° C. The solids were collected by filtration. This resulted in 5.1 g (48%) of (2S,4R)-1-[(2S)-2-amino-3,3-dimethylbutanoyl]-4-hydroxy-N-[[4-(4-methyl-1,3-thiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 431 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CD 3 OD) δ 9.84-9.82 (s, 1H), 7.58-7.54 (m, 4H), 4.71-4.41 (m, 4H), 4.13-4.08 (m, 1H), 3.86-3.71 (m, 2H), 3.36 (s, 1H), 2.60-2.58 (s, 3H), 2.35-2.07 (m, 2H), 1.19-1.12 (m, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 1-(4-(azetidin-3-yl)piperazin-1-yl)-2-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)amino)ethan-1-one hydrochloride

N-(4-chloro-2-methoxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)acetamide was prepared followed the procedure outlined in patent U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/288045 A1, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

To a solution of N-(4-chloro-2-methoxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)acetamide (2.0 g, 7.88 mmol, 1.0 equiv) in EtSH (20 mL) was added AlCl 3 (10.5 g, 78.8 mmol, 1.0 eq) at 20° C. After stirring for 20 hours, the mixture was quenched with ice water. The pH was adjusted to ˜9 with aq. NaHCO 3 , and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel with PE:EtOAc (1:1) to afford the desired product N-(4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)acetamide (1.2 g, yield: 63.6%) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 241.1 [M+1] + .

A solution of N-(4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)acetamide (0.4 g, 2.51 mmol, 1.0 equiv) in EtOH/con.HCl (27.5 mL, 10/1, v/v) was stirred at 100° C. for 5 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the mixture was removed in vacuo to afford desired product 2-amino-5-chloro-4-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenol (0.4 g, yield 100%) as a brown solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 198.1 [M+1] + .

To a solution of 2-amino-5-chloro-4-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenol (0.4 g, 2.0 mmol, 1.0 equiv) in MeOH (20 mL) were added AcOH (3 drops) and ethyl glyoxalate (306 mg, 3.0 mmol, 50% in toluene) at 20° C. After stirring for 2 hours, NaBH 3 CN (378 mg, 6.0 mmol) was added. The resulting solution was stirred at 50° C. for 20 hours. Then the reaction was poured into ethyl acetate and aqueous solution. The organic phase was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel with PE:EtOAc (10:1) to give ethyl (4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycinate (0.4 g, yield: 70.5%) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 284.1 [M+1] + .

To a solution of ethyl (4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycinate (0.4 g, 1.48 mmol, 1.0 equiv) in THF/H 2 O (16 Ml, 3/1, v/v) was added LiOH (620 mg, 14.8 mmol) at 25° C. After stirring for 1 hour, the pH was adjusted to ˜2 with 1M HCl. The mixture was taken up with EtOAc. The organic phase was dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and concentrated to give (4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycine (0.18 g) as a brown oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CD 3 OD) δ 6.66 (s, 1H), 6.25 (s, 1H), 5.38 (q, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (s, 2H), 1.90 (s, 3H), 1.72 (dd, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of benzyl piperazine-1-carboxylate (10 g, 45.4 mmol) and tert-butyl 3-oxoazetidine-1-carboxylate (8.5 g, 49.6 mmol) in MeOH (200 mL) was added AcOH (3 mL). After stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour, NaBH 3 CN (8.5 g, 136.2 mmol) was added to the mixture and the resulting mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hours. The mixture was quenched with aq. NaHCO 3 and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel with PE:EtOAc (5:1) to give benzyl 4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)azetidin-3-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (12.6 g, yield: 75%) as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.38-7.30 (m, 5H), 5.13 (s, 2H), 4.17-4.09 (m, 2H), 3.94-3.90 (m, 2H), 3.59-3.52 (m, 4H), 3.09-3.04 (m, 1H), 2.30 (s, 4H), 1.43 (s, 9H).

To a solution of benzyl 4-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)azetidin-3-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (1.7 g, 4.53 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was added Pd/C (0.5 g, 10%). The resulting mixture was stirred under H 2 at 25° C. for 20 h. The mixture was filtered, evaporated under reduced pressure to afford tert-butyl 3-(piperazin-1-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate (950 mg, yield: 87%) as a colorless oil.

Step 8: Preparation of tert-butyl 3-(4-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycyl)piperazin-1-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of tert-butyl 3-(piperazin-1-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate (250 mg, 1.03 mmol) were added DIEA (530 mg, 4.1 mmol), (4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycine (290 mg, 1.13 mmol) and PyBOP (1.07 g, 2.06 mmol). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was quenched with water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography on silica gel with DCM:MeOH (50:1-20:1) to give tert-butyl 3-(4-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycyl)piperazin-1-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate (210 mg, yield: 43%) as a brown oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 479.2 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 6.84-6.79 (m, 1H), 6.43 (s, 1H), 3.96-3.88 (m, 4H), 3.82-3.79 (m, 2H), 3.71 (s, 2H), 3.48 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H), 3.11-3.08 (m, 1H), 2.36 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 4H), 1.93 (s, 2H), 1.82-1.73 (m, 3H), 1.41 (s, 9H), 1.26-1.23 (m, 2H).

Step 9: Preparation of 1-(4-(azetidin-3-yl)piperazin-1-yl)-2-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)amino)ethan-1-one hydrochloride

A solution of tert-butyl 3-(4-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)glycyl)piperazin-1-yl)azetidine-1-carboxylate (210 mg, 0.44 mmol) in in dioxane (2 mL) and HCl (6M in dioxane, 1 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 0.5 h. The mixture was concentrated to give 1-(4-(azetidin-3-yl)piperazin-1-yl)-2-((4-chloro-2-hydroxy-5-(1-methylcyclopropyl)phenyl)amino)ethan-1-one hydrochloride (120 mg, yield: 66%) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 379.2 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

To a mixture of (tert-butoxycarbonyl)-L-proline (20.3 g, 94.20 mmol) and triethylamine (16 ml) in tetrahydrofuran (80 ml) was added a solution of methyl 2-chloroacetate (30.0 g, 245.9 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (40 ml) was at −10° C. After stirring for 30 minutes, to the reaction mixture was added ammonium hydroxide (30 ml) at −10° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure to a residue which was taken up with ethyl acetate (100 ml), wash with aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate (sat 40 ml), then brine (40 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a tert-butyl (S)-2-carbamoylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (22.0 g) as colorless oil.

A mixture of (S)-2-carbamoylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (22.0 g) in tetrahydrofuran (80 ml) and Lawesson reagent (41.8 g, 103.40 mmol) was stirred at 70° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (400 ml) and water (400 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (300 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl (S)-2-carbamothioylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (8.3 g, 38% yield) as white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 231.0 [M+1] + .

A mixture of tert-butyl (S)-2-carbamothioylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (8.3 g, 40.4 mmol) and ethyl 3-bromo-2-oxopropanoate (13.8 g, 56.6 mmol) in ethanol (80 ml) was stirred at 60° C. for 2 hours. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue, which was taken up in saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate (10.6 g, 100 mmol in 80 ml water)-tetrahydrofuran (80 mL). To the resulting mixture was added di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (8.81 g, 40.4 mmol), and stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure, and the resulting aqueous solution was extracted with ethyl acetate (300 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (150 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford ethyl (S)-2-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)thiazole-4-carboxylate (6.8 g, 52% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 327.0 [M+1] + .

A mixture of ethyl (S)-2-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)thiazole-4-carboxylate (6.8 g, 20.90 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (1.67 g, 41.8 mmol) in methanol (30 ml)-water (30 ml) was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure. The resulting aqueous solution was acidified with aqueous hydrochloride acid (1N) to pH to 3-4, and extracted ethyl acetate (60 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (20 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford (S)-2-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)thiazole-4-carboxylic acid (4.5 g, 72% yield) as white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 299.0 [M+1] + .

Step 5: Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-2-(4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

To a mixture of (S)-2-(1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)pyrrolidin-2-yl)thiazole-4-carboxylic acid (3.88 g, 15.10 mmol), N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (1.53 g, 15.60 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (5.03 g, 39.0 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (20 ml) were added 1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (3.25 g, 16.90 mmol) and 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole (2.11 g, 15.60 mmol) at 0° C., the resulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (200 ml) and water (100 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with water (100 ml×2) then brine (100 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl (S)-2-(4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (3.46 g, 78% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 342.0 [M+1] + .

To a mixture of tert-butyl (S)-2-(4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (3.3 g, 9.46 mmol) in anhydrous tetrahydrofuran (30 ml) as added (3-methoxyphenyl)magnesium bromide (28.4 ml, 28.40 mmol) was dropped at −40° C., the mixture was stirred at −40° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was quenched with ammonium chloride solution (100 ml) at −0° C. The resulting mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (30 ml×3). The organic layers were collected, washed with brine (80 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford (S)-tert-butyl 2-(4-(3-methoxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (3.49 g, 95% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 389.1 [M+1] + .

To a mixture of tert-butyl (S)-2-(4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (3.49 g, 8.99 mmol) in dichloromethane (20 ml), a solution of tribromo borane (4.2 ml) in dichloromethane (10 ml) was added at −45° C., the mixture was stirred at −45° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was quenched with methanol (1 ml) at −78° C. After warmed to room temperature, the resulting mixture was partitioned between dichloromethane (30 ml) and water (30 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (15 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 5% methanol in dichloromethane) to afford (S)-tert-butyl 2-(4-(3-methoxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (1.25 g, 51% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 275.1 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)carbamate

To a mixture of (S)-tert-butyl 2-(4-(3-methoxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (1.20 g, 4.38 mmol), (S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-2-cyclohexylacetic acid (2.81 g, 10.95 mmol) and N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (5.65 g, 43.80 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 ml) were added 1-Ethyl-3-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (2.52 g, 13.14 mmol), 1-Hydroxybenzotriazole (1.77 g, 13.14 mmol) at 0° C., the resulting mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (30 ml) and water (30 ml). The organic layer was collected, washed with brine (15 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was taken up in methanol, potassium carbonate (1.51 g, 10.95 mmol) was added, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford to afford tert-butyl ((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)carbamate (1.35 g, 60% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 514.2 [M+1] + .

Step 9: Preparation of (S)-2-amino-2-cyclohexyl-1-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethan-1-one

To a mixture of tert-butyl ((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl) pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)carbamate (1.34 g, 2.61 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 ml), 1 M hydrochloride in dioxane (1.0 ml) was added, the mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1.5 hours. The volatiles were evaporated under reduced pressure to give a residue which was basified with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, extracted with dichloromethane (20 ml×2). The organic layers were collected, washed with brine (15 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford a (S)-2-amino-2-cyclohexyl-1-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl) pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethanone (980 mg) as light yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 414.1 [M+1] + .

Step 10: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

To a mixture of (S)-2-amino-2-cyclohexyl-1-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl) pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethanone (980 mg, 2.37 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 ml), N-ethyl-N-isopropylpropan-2-amine (5.03 g, 39.0 mmol) were added a solution of tert-butyl (S)-(1-(2,5-dioxopyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate (673 mg, 2.37 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 ml) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred for 1 hour. The mixture was diluted with dichloromethane (30 ml) and washed with water (30 ml), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a crude residue which was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (eluted with 20% ethyl acetate in hexane) to afford tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(3-hydroxybenzoyl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate (895 mg, 62% yield) as white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 599.1 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-0S)-2-(4-(4-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

Step 1: Preparation of methyl (S)-2-((S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)(methyl)amino)propanamido)-2-cyclohexylacetate

To a mixture of methyl (2S)-2-amino-2-cyclohexyl-acetate (1.60 g, 7.70 mmol, 1.00 eq, hydrogen chloride) and (2S)-2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]propanoic acid (1.57 g, 7.70 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added O-(7-azabenzotriazole-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (4.39 g, 11.56 mmol, 1.50 eq) and triethylamine (2.34 g, 23.11 mmol, 3.22 mL, 3.00 eq) in one portion. The mixture was stirred at 30° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was washed with water (50 mL×2) and the organic phase was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=5/1) to give compound methyl(2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]propanoyl]amino]-2-cyclohexyl-acetate (2.40 g, 6.73 mmol, 87% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 357.2 [M+1] + .

Step 2: Preparation of (S)-2-((S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)(methyl)amino)propanamido)-2-cyclohexylacetic acid

To a mixture of methyl (2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]propanoyl]amino]-2-cyclohexyl-acetate (2.40 g, 6.73 mmol, 1.00 eq) in Tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) was added a mixture of lithium hydroxide (0.42 g, 10.10 mmol, 1.50 eq) in water (5 mL) in portions at 0° C. under Nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was diluted with water (50 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×2). The water phase was adjusted pH to about 5 with hydrogen chloride solution (1 M). Then it was extracted with ethyl acetate (40 mL×3). The combined organic layer was washed with water (80 mL×2) and brine (80 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the product. Compound (2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]propanoyl]amino]-2-cyclohexyl-acetic acid (2.20 g, 6.42 mmol, 95% yield) was obtained as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 287.1 [M−55] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.01-6.55 (m, 1H), 4.74 (br s, 1H), 4.52 (br dd, J=5.0, 8.3 Hz, 1H), 2.81 (d, J=3.3 Hz, 3H), 1.95-1.81 (m, 1H), 1.79-1.59 (m, 4H), 1.49 (s, 8H), 1.40-1.18 (m, 5H), 1.16-0.96 (m, 3H).

A mixture of 1-fluoronaphthalene (5.00 g, 34.21 mmol, 4.42 mL, 1.00 eq) and aluminum chloride (6.84 g, 51.31 mmol, 2.80 mL, 1.50 eq) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added acetyl chloride (3.22 g, 41.05 mmol, 2.93 mL, 1.20 eq) in dichloromethane (10 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 0.5 hour. Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 4 hours. The mixture was pouring into water (60 mL), It was extracted with dichloromethane (50 mL×2). The combined organic layer was washed with water (80 mL×2) and brine (80 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=I/O to 20/1) to give compound 1-(4-fluoro-1-naphthyl) ethanone (5.40 g, 28.69 mmol, 84% yield) as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.94-8.86 (m, 1H), 8.17 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (dd, J=5.4, 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.71-7.65 (m, 1H), 7.64-7.58 (m, 1H), 7.16 (dd, J=8.1, 9.7 Hz, 1H), 2.84-2.67 (m, 3H).

A mixture of phenylmethanol (4.48 g, 41.45 mmol, 4.31 mL, 1.50 eq) in dimethylformamide (60 mL) was added potassium tert-butoxide (4.65 g, 41.45 mmol, 1.50 eq) The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 0.5 hour. Then 1-(4-fluoro-1-naphthyl) ethanone (5.20 g, 27.63 mmol, 1.00 eq) was added to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (200 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL×2). The combined organic layer was washed with water (100 mL×2) and brine (100 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=30/1 to 10/1) to give compound 1-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl) ethanone (7.64 g, 22.80 mmol, 83% yield) as a white solid.

To a mixture of 1-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl) ethanone (5.00 g, 18.09 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dichloromethane (300 mL) was added liquid bromine (2.89 g, 18.09 mmol, 932.78 uL, 1.00 eq) in portions at 20° C. under N 2 . The mixture was stirred for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition of sat. sodium thiosulfate (50 mL) and the organic phase was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=30/1) to give compound 1-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)-2-bromo-ethanone (4.50 g, 12.67 mmol, 70% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 354.9 [M+1] + .

Step 6: Preparation of tert-butyl (S)-2-(4-(4-(benzyloxy)naphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

To a mixture of 1-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)-2-bromo-ethanone (3.90 g, 10.98 mmol, 1.00 eq) and tert-butyl (2S)-2-carbamothioylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (3.79 g, 16.47 mmol, 1.50 eq) in ethyl alcohol (80 mL) was added Pyridine (0.87 g, 10.98 mmol, 886.16 uL, 1.00 eq) under Nitrogen. The mixture was heated to 80° C. and stirred for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=5/1) to give compound tert-butyl (2S)-2-[4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (5.30 g, 10.89 mmol, 99% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 487.3 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.49-8.37 (m, 1H), 8.35-8.31 (m, 1H), 8.23 (br s, 1H), 7.61-7.48 (m, 5H), 7.47-7.33 (m, 3H), 7.27 (s, 1H), 7.26 (br s, 1H), 6.93 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 3.77-3.42 (m, 2H), 2.48-2.25 (m, 2H), 2.14-1.94 (m, 3H), 1.57-1.34 (m, 9H).

To a mixture of tert-butyl (2S)-2-[4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (2.00 g, 4.11 mmol, 1.00 eq) in Dichloromethane (36 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (18.12 g, 158.89 mmol, 11.76 mL, 38.66 eq) in one portion under N 2 . The mixture was stirred at 30° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum. Compound 4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)-2-[(2S)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]thiazole (2.06 g, trifluoroacetic acid) was obtained as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 387.2 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-2-((S)-2-(4-(4-(benzyloxy)naphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

To a mixture of (2S)-2-[[(2S)-2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]propanoyl]amino]-2-cyclohexyl-acetic acid (1.15 g, 3.36 mmol, 1 eq) 4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)-2-[(2S)-pyrrolidin-2-yl]thiazole (2.02 g, 4.03 mmol, 1.2 eq, trifluoroacetic acid) and 4-methylmorpholine (1.36 g, 13.43 mmol, 1.48 mL, 4 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (40 mL) and dimethyl formamide (4 mL) was added 4-(4,6-dimethoxy-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-4-methyl-morpholin-4-ium; chloride; hydrate (1.98 g, 6.72 mmol, 2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition water (30 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×3), then the organic phase was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=5/1) to give compound tert-butylN-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-2-[(2S)-2-[4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.80 g, 1.09 mmol, 33% yield, 97% purity) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 711.3 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.46-8.39 (m, 1H), 8.25-8.18 (m, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H), 7.59-7.49 (m, 5H), 7.47-7.34 (m, 3H), 7.25 (s, 1H), 6.92 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 1H), 5.70-5.61 (m, 1H), 4.79-4.59 (m, 2H), 3.96-3.78 (m, 2H), 2.97 (s, 2H), 2.89 (s, 2H), 2.82 (s, 3H), 2.47 (br s, 1H), 2.37-2.16 (m, 2H), 2.05 (s, 2H), 1.88-1.54 (m, 17H), 1.50 (s, 9H), 1.53-1.45 (m, 1H), 1.35 (d, J=7.1 Hz, 3H), 1.30-0.93 (m, 9H).

Step 9: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(4-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

To a mixture of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-2-[(2S)-2-[4-(4-benzyloxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.50 g, 0.70 mmol, 1.00 eq) in Methyl alcohol (10 mL) was added Hydroxide palladium (0.36 g, 2.53 mmol, 3.60 eq) and Hydrogen (0.01 g, 0.70 mmol, 1.00 eq) in one portion under Nitrogen. The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuum. Compound tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-[(2S)-2-[4-(4-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.3 g, 0.48 mmol, 69% yield) was obtained as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 621.3 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(4-(2-(2-(2-(methylamino)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

Step 1: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-2-((S)-2-(4-(4-(2-(2-(2-bromoethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

To a mixture of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-[(2S)-2-[4-(4-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.30 g, 0.48 mmol, 1.00 eq) and 1,2-bis(2-bromoethoxy)ethane (0.27 g, 0.97 mmol, 2.00 eq) in acetonitrile (12 mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.23 g, 1.69 mmol, 3.50 eq) under Nitrogen. The mixture was heated to 80° C. and stirred for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was washed with water (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL), then the organic phase was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=1/1) to give compound tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-2-[(2S)-2-[4-[4-[2-[2-(2-bromoethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-1-naphthyl]thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.15 g, 0.18 mmol, 38% yield) as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 817.3 [M+1] + .

Step 2: Preparation of tert-butyl ((S)-1-(((S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-((S)-2-(4-(4-(2-(2-(2-(methylamino)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)naphthalen-1-yl)thiazol-2-yl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-2-oxoethyl)amino)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)(methyl)carbamate

A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-2-[(2S)-2-[4-[4-[2-[2-(2-bromoethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]-1-naphthyl]thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-1-cyclohexyl-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.14 g, 0.17 mmol, 1.00 eq) and methylamine/ethyl alcohol (10 mL) was heated to 60° C. and stirred for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuum. Compound tert-butyl N-[(1S)-2-[[(1S)-1-cyclohexyl-2-[(2S)-2-[4-[4-[2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]-1-naphthyl]thiazol-2-yl]pyrrolidin-1-yl]-2-oxo-ethyl]amino]-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (0.13 g) was obtained as a white solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 766.4 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

Step 1: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

To a solution of 2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (400 mg, 0.96 mmol, 1 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 mL) was added (1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)potassium (213 mg, 1.15 mmol, 1.2 eq). The mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (20 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-TLC (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=3/1) to give tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-(1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (300 mg, 0.76 mmol, 79% yield) as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 415.1 [M+23] + .

To a solution of tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-(1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (300 mg, 0.76 mmol, 1 eq) in ethanol (5 mL) was added hydrazine hydrate (382 mg, 7.64 mmol, 0.4 mL, 10 eq). The mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL) and the aqueous phase was extracted with dichloromethane (20 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (20 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by prep-TLC (dichloromethane/methanol=5/2) to give tert-butyl N-[2-[2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (120 mg, 0.46 mmol, 59% yield) as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.66-3.56 (m, 6H), 3.55-3.49 (m, 2H), 3.40 (br s, 2H), 2.99-2.79 (m, 5H), 1.74 (br s, 3H), 1.46 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of (2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-cyano-N-(2-methoxy-4-((2-(2-(2-(methylamino)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)carbamoyl)phenyl)-5-neopentylpyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a mixture of 3-chloro-2-fluoro-benzaldehyde (13.7 g, 86.68 mmol, 1.05 eq) and 2-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)acetonitrile (14 g, 82.56 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (200 mL) was added the solution of sodium methoxide (13.4 g, 247.67 mmol, 3 eq) in methanol (40 mL) dropwise at 0° C. under nitrogen atmosphere. The product begins to precipitate during the addition. The suspension was stirred at 45° C. for 5 hours. The solid was filtered and washed with water (200 mL) and methanol (50 mL) and then was dried in vacuum to give (Z)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-2-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)prop-2-enenitrile (24 g, 77.39 mmol, 93% yield) as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.20-8.10 (m, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 7.64-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.33-7.20 (m, 3H).

To a mixture of 2-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)acetic acid (5.9 g, 28.17 mmol, 1.1 eq) and ethyl 4-amino-3-methoxy-benzoate (5 g, 25.61 mmol, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was added O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N,N-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (11.7 g, 30.74 mmol, 1.2 eq) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (6.6 g, 51.23 mmol, 8.9 mL, 2 eq) at 0° C. under nitrogen. The mixture was warmed to 20° C. and stirred for 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (200 mL×2), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=10/1, 3/1 to 1/1) to give ethyl 4-[[2-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)acetyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (9 g, 23.29 mmol, 91% yield) as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.41 (br d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.68 (br d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.42-7.28 (m, 5H), 5.61 (br s, 1H), 5.18 (s, 2H), 4.42-4.32 (m, 2H), 4.11-4.01 (m, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 1.40 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of ethyl 4-[[2-(benzyloxycarbonylamino)acetyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (8.8 g, 22.77 mmol, 1 eq) in ethanol (100 mL) was added palladium on activated carbon catalyst (1 g, 10% purity) under nitrogen atmosphere. The suspension was degassed under vacuum and purged with hydrogen several times. The mixture was stirred under hydrogen (15 psi) at 50° C. for 24 hours. Then the mixture was stirred under hydrogen (50 psi) at 50° C. for 5 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=10/1, 3/1 to 1/1) to give ethyl 4-[(2-aminoacetyl)amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (3.2 g, 12.69 mmol, 56% yield) as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 10.00 (br s, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (dd, J=1.6, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 4.38 (q, J=7.2 Hz, 2H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 3.53 (s, 2H), 1.40 (t, J=7.2 Hz, 3H).

To a mixture of ethyl 4-[(2-aminoacetyl)amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (3.2 g, 12.69 mmol, 1 eq) and 3,3-dimethylbutanal (1.3 g, 12.94 mmol, 1.6 mL, 1.02 eq) in dichloromethane (50 mL) was added magnesium sulfate (3.0 g, 25.37 mmol, 2 eq) at 20° C. The mixture was stirred for 20 hours. The mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuum to give ethyl 4-[[2-[(E)-3,3-dimethylbutylideneamino]acetyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (4.24 g, 12.68 mmol, 100% yield) as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 9.45 (br s, 1H), 8.53 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.89-7.82 (m, 1H), 7.72-7.68 (m, 1H), 7.58-7.53 (m, 1H), 4.39-4.34 (m, 2H), 4.25-4.20 (m, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 2.30-2.27 (m, 2H), 1.42-1.38 (m, 3H), 1.04 (s, 9H).

Step 5: Preparation of ethyl 4-((2R,3S,4R,5R)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-cyano-5-neopentylpyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)-3-methoxybenzoate

To a solution of [1-(2-diphenylphosphanyl-1-naphthyl)-2-naphthyl]-diphenyl-phosphane (530 mg, 0.85 mmol, 0.12 eq) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added acetoxycopper (95 mg, 0.78 mmol, 0.11 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 30 minutes. Ethyl 4-[[2-[(E)-3,3-dimethylbutylideneamino]acetyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (2.6 g, 7.80 mmol, 1.1 eq) and (Z)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-2-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)prop-2-enenitrile (2.2 g, 7.09 mmol, 1 eq) in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was added at 20° C. under nitrogen atmosphere. Then triethylamine (717 mg, 7.09 mmol, 1.0 mL, 1 eq) was added. The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 36 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (100 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (100 mL×2), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=10/1 to 5/1) to give ethyl 4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5R)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (3 g, 4.65 mmol, 65% yield) as a yellow solid.

Step 6: Preparation of 4-((2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-cyano-5-neopentylpyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)-3-methoxybenzoic acid

To a mixture of ethyl 4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5R)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoate (3.0 g, 4.65 mmol, 1 eq) in water (5 mL), tetrahydrofuran (5 mL) and methanol (5 mL) was added sodium hydroxide (937 mg, 23.44 mmol, 5.04 eq) at 20° C. The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was then heated to 50° C. and stirred for another 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL) and acidified with 1N hydrochloride acid until pH=5. The product begins to precipitate during the addition. The solid was filtered and dried in vacuum to give the crude product. The solid was triturated with acetonitrile (100 mL) to give 4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoic acid (1.2 g, 1.91 mmol, 41% yield, 98% ee, 95% de, 98% purity) as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CD 3 OD) δ 8.38 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.76-7.70 (m, 1H), 7.69-7.62 (m, 2H), 7.44-7.30 (m, 3H), 7.28-7.19 (m, 2H), 4.79-4.76 (m, 1H), 4.64 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 4.16-4.04 (m, 2H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 1.76-1.66 (m, 1H), 1.36 (br d, J=14.0 Hz, 1H), 1.04 (s, 9H).

Step 7: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(4-((2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-cyano-5-neopentylpyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)-3-methoxybenzamido)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

To the mixture of 4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoic acid (200 mg, 0.32 mmol, 1 eq) and tert-butyl N-[2-[2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (85 mg, 0.32 mmol, 1 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (8 mL) was added 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (65 mg, 0.48 mmol, 1.5 eq), N-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (93 mg, 0.48 mmol, 1.5 eq) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (125 mg, 0.97 mmol, 0.17 mL, 3 eq). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was quenched with water (25 mL). Then it was extracted with ethyl acetate (25 mL×3). The combined organic layer was washed with water (35 mL×2) and brine (35 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by prep-TLC (dichloromethane:methanol=10:1). tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[[4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoyl]amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (230 mg, 0.26 mmol, 82% yield) was obtained as a light yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 860.4 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of (2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluorophenyl)-4-cyano-N-(2-methoxy-4-((2-(2-(2-(methylamino)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)carbamoyl)phenyl)-5-neopentylpyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To the mixture of tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[[4-[[(2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]-3-methoxy-benzoyl]amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (230 mg, 0.26 mmol, 1 eq) in dichloromethane (8 mL) was added trifluoroacetic acid (2.00 mL). The mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 0.5 hour. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give the product. (2R,3S,4R,5S)-3-(3-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-(4-chloro-2-fluoro-phenyl)-4-cyano-5-(2,2-dimethylpropyl)-N-[2-methoxy-4-[2-[2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethylcarbamoyl]phenyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (230 mg, trifluoroacetate) was obtained as a light yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 760.3 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-(2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)-1-(3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of 3,5-dimethylisoxazole (15 g, 154.46 mmol, 15 mL, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (150 mL) was added n-butyllithium (2.5 M, 77 mL, 1.25 eq) dropwise at −78° C. under nitrogen, the mixture was stirred at −55° C. for 30 minutes, and then carbon dioxide was bubbled into the mixture for 30 minutes, the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was quenched by saturated ammonium chloride solution (50 mL) the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL). The aqueous phase was adjusted with aqueous hydrochloric acid solution (2 M) until pH=2, the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL, three times), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give 2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)acetic acid (10 g, 70.86 mmol, 46% yield) as a brown solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 12.74 (br s, 1H), 6.24 (s, 1H), 3.83 (s, 2H), 2.20 (s, 3H).

To a solution of 2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)acetic acid (10 g, 70.86 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (100 mL) was added thionyl chloride (12.65 g, 106.29 mmol, 7.71 mL, 1.5 eq) at 0° C., and the mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 4 hours. The mixture was concentrated to give crude product. This crude was diluted with ethyl acetate (200 mL) and washed by water (200 mL), and then saturated sodium bicarbonate aqueous solution (50 mL) and then brine (50 mL), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous, filtered and the filtrate was condensed to give methyl 2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)acetate (10 g, 64.45 mmol, 91% yield) as a brown oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 6.11 (s, 1H), 3.80 (s, 2H), 3.76 (s, 3H), 2.30 (s, 3H).

To a solution of methyl 2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)acetate (10 g, 64.45 mmol, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was added sodium hydride (3.87 g, 96.68 mmol, 60% purity, 1.5 eq) at 0° C. and then 2-iodopropane (13.15 g, 77.34 mmol, 7.74 mL, 1.2 eq) was added at 0° C., the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. Additional 2-iodopropane (2.55 g, 15.00 mmol, 1.5 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 10 hours. The mixture was quenched by aqueous hydrochloric acid solution (1 M, 300 mL) and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL, three times), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give methyl 3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoate (13 g) as a brown oil.

To a solution of methyl 3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoate (12.7 g, 64.39 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (90 mL) and water (60 mL) was added sodium hydroxide (12.88 g, 321.96 mmol, 5 eq), the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was concentrated to removed methanol, and then the residue was diluted with water (200 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL), the aqueous phase was adjusted by aqueous hydrochloric acid solution (2 M) until pH=3, and then the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (200 mL, three times), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give crude product as a brown oil, this crude was purified by flash prep-HPLC, the fraction of acetonitrile was removed and the residue was extracted with dichloromethane (300 mL×5), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give product 3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoic acid (7.5 g, 40.94 mmol, 63% yield) as white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 6.26 (s, 1H), 3.58 (d, J=8.7 Hz, 1H), 2.33-2.23 (m, 1H), 2.21 (s, 3H), 0.95 (d, J=6.7 Hz, 3H), 0.82 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of 4-bromo-2-hydroxy-benzonitrile (15 g, 75.75 mmol, 1 eq) and 4-methylthiazole (20.28 g, 204.53 mmol, 19 mL, 2.7 eq) in N-methyl pyrrolidone (150 mL) was added potassium acetate (22.30 g, 227.25 mmol, 3 eq) and palladium acetate (1.70 g, 7.58 mmol, 0.1 eq)), the mixture stirred at 110° C. under nitrogen for 6 hours. The mixture was quenched with water (500 mL), the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL×3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (200 mL, twice), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under vacuum and then methyl tertiary butyl ether (500 mL) was added to the mixture and the organic phase was washed with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL, twice). The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=3/1 to 1/1). Compound 2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzonitrile (11 g, 50.87 mmol, 67% yield) was obtained as a yellow solid.

To a solution of 2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzonitrile (11 g, 50.87 mmol, 1 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (150 mL) was added lithium aluminum hydride (7.72 g, 203.46 mmol, 4 eq) at 0° C., the mixture was stirred at 50° C. for 3 hours. The mixture was quenched by water (8 mL) at 0° C., and then 15% sodium hydroxide aqueous solution (8 mL) and then water (8 mL), anhydrous sodium sulfate (30 g) was added, the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 30 minutes, filtered and the solid was added dichloromethane/methanol (4/1, 50 mL), the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hours, filtered and the filtrate combined was concentrated to give 2-(aminomethyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenol (7 g, 31.78 mmol, 62% yield) as a brown solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 8.82 (s, 1H), 6.90 (d, J=7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.52 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 6.25 (dd, J=1.7, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 3.59 (s, 2H), 2.41 (s, 3H).

Step 7: Preparation of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-((2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of 2-(aminomethyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenol (7 g, 31.78 mmol, 1 eq) and (2S,4R)-1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-4-hydroxy-pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (7.35 g, 31.78 mmol, 1 eq) in dimethylformamide (70 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (12.32 g, 95.33 mmol, 16.60 mL, 3 eq) and then HATU (13.29 g, 34.95 mmol, 1.1 eq), the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. Additional (2S,4R)-1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-4-hydroxy-pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (7.35 g, 31.78 mmol, 1 eq) and HATU (12.08 g, 31.78 mmol, 1 eq) was added, the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (300 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL, twice), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give crude product as a brown oil, this crude was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran/water (2/1, 150 mL) and lithium hydroxide (3 g) was added, the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was diluted with water (300 mL) and adjusted with aqueous hydrochloric acid solution (0.5 M) until pH=7, the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL, twice), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and filtrate was concentrated to give crude product, this crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (2-10% methonal in dichloromethane) to give tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methylcarbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (6.9 g, 15.92 mmol, 50% yield) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 434.1 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-(2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methylcarbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (6.9 g, 15.92 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (30 mL) was added hydrochloric/dioxane (4 M, 30 mL, 7.54 eq), the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 20 minutes. The mixture was concentrated to give product as a yellow solid, this crude product was triturated by ethyl acetate and petroleum ether (1:1, 20 mL), the mixture was filtered and the solid was dried by rotary evaporator to give product (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (4.83 g, 13.06 mmol, 82% yield, hydrochloric acid) as a yellow solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) δ 10.03 (br s, 1H), 9.11-8.95 (m, 2H), 8.66 (br s, 1H), 7.20 (d, J=7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J=1.3 Hz, 1H), 6.90 (dd, J=1.7, 7.8 Hz, 1H), 4.44 (br s, 1H), 4.40-4.26 (m, 3H), 3.41-3.27 (m, 1H), 3.13-3.02 (m, 1H), 2.46 (s, 3H), 2.33 (br dd, J=7.5, 12.7 Hz, 1H), 1.96-1.85 (m, 1H), 1.33-1.24 (m, 1H).

Step 9: Preparation of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-(2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)benzyl)-1-(3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide

To a solution of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (4.83 g, 13.06 mmol, 1 eq, hydrochloride) in dimethylformamide (60 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (5.06 g, 39.18 mmol, 6.82 mL, 3 eq), and then 3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoic acid (2.39 g, 13.06 mmol, 1 eq) and HATU (5.46 g, 14.36 mmol, 1.1 eq) was added, the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (200 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL, twice), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give crude product. This crude product was purified by prep-HPLC, the fraction of acetonitrile was removed, and the residue was extracted with dichloromethane (300 mL×5), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and the filtrate was concentrated to give product (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]-1-[3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (4.0 g, 8.02 mmol, 61% yield) as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CD 3 OD) δ 8.85 (s, 1H), 7.39-7.23 (m, 1H), 6.98-6.86 (m, 2H), 6.31-6.06 (m, 1H), 4.65-4.28 (m, 4H), 3.94-3.48 (m, 3H), 2.52-2.45 (m, 3H), 2.42-2.31 (m, 1H), 2.26-2.15 (m, 4H), 2.13-2.03 (m, 1H), 1.08-1.01 (m, 3H), 0.92-0.81 (m, 3H).

Exemplary Synthesis of 2-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)(methyl)amino)ethoxy)ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate

To a solution of 2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethanol (55.66 g, 524.53 mmol, 49.70 mL, 2 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (500 mL) was added sodium hydride (6.29 g, 157.27 mmol, 60% purity, 0.6 eq) at 0° C. and stirred for 0.5 hour under nitrogen. Then the mixture was added p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (50 g, 262.26 mmol, 1 eq), warmed to 25° C. and stirred for 6 hours. The mixture was poured into saturated ammonium chloride solution (200 mL) and stirred for 15 minutes. The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL×2). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (200 mL), dried with anhydrous anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=10/1 to 1/1) to afford 2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (35 g, 134.46 mmol, 51% yield) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 261.0 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.76-7.72 (m, 2H), 7.28 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.15-4.02 (m, 2H), 3.66-3.55 (m, 4H), 3.49-3.44 (m, 2H), 2.38 (s, 3H).

A mixture of 2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (3 g, 11.52 mmol, 1 eq) in methanamine (11.93 g, 115.25 mmol, 10 eq) was degassed and purged with nitrogen for 3 times, and then the mixture was stirred at 85° C. for 16 hours under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. Compound 2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethanol (1.37 g, 11.50 mmol, 99% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.72-3.47 (m, 8H), 2.67-2.63 (m, 3H).

A mixture of 2-[2-(methylamino)ethoxy]ethanol (1.37 g, 11.50 mmol, 1 eq) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (3.01 g, 13.80 mmol, 3.17 mL, 1.2 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was degassed and purged with nitrogen for 3 times, and then the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 16 hours under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition water 200 mL, and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL×3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (100 mL×3), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=50/1 to 5/1). Compound tert-butyl N-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (1.7 g, 7.75 mmol, 67% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.77-3.68 (m, 2H), 3.66-3.55 (m, 4H), 3.42 (br s, 2H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 1.48-1.25 (m, 9H).

Step 4: Preparation of 2-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)(methyl)amino)ethoxy)ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate

A mixture of tert-butyl N-[2-(2-hydroxyethoxy)ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (1.1 g, 5.02 mmol, 1 eq), p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (1.91 g, 10.03 mmol, 2 eq), and triethylamine (1.52 g, 15.05 mmol, 2.09 mL, 3 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was degassed and purged with nitrogen for 3 times, and then the mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was quenched by addition water 200 mL, and extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL×3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (100 mL×3), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by column chromatography (Petroleum ether/Ethyl acetate=30/1 to 10/1). Compound 2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.6 g, 4.28 mmol, 85% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.73 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 2H), 4.12-4.01 (m, 2H), 3.60-3.52 (m, 2H), 3.45 (br s, 2H), 3.25 (br s, 2H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.38 (s, 3H), 1.37 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((R)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate and tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((S)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

Step 1: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-(3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

A mixture of 2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (70 mg, 0.18 mmol, 1 eq), (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[[2-hydroxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]methyl]-1-[3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (93 mg, 0.18 mmol, 1 eq) and potassium carbonate (51 mg, 0.37 mmol, 2 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (2 mL) was degassed and purged with nitrogen for 3 times, and then the mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 4 hours under nitrogen. The reaction mixture was quenched by the addition of water (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL×3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (10 mL×3), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by prep-TLC (9% methanol in dichloromethane) to give the compound tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[[[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-[3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]methyl]-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (100 mg, 0.14 mmol, 76% yield) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 722.4 [M+23] + .

Step 2: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((R)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate and tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((S)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

Tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[[[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-[3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl]pyrrolidine-2-carbonyl]amino]methyl]-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (250 mg, 0.35 mmol, 1 eq) was purified by prep-SFC. Compounds tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((R)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate (90 mg, 0.12 mmol, 33% yield, 94% purity) and tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-(((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-1-((S)-3-methyl-2-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)butanoyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamido)methyl)-5-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate (90 mg, 0.12 mmol, 35% yield, 99% purity) were obtained as colorless oils.

Exemplary Synthesis of methyl 2-(3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methylbutanoate

To a solution of methyl 3-hydroxyisoxazole-5-carboxylate (7.20 g, 50.31 mmol, 1.00 eq) in acetone (150 mL) was added potassium carbonate (13.91 g, 100.62 mmol, 2.00 eq). The mixture was heated to 80° C. for 1 hour, then (bromomethyl) benzene (10.33 g, 60.37 mmol, 1.20 eq) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at 80° C. for another 3 hours. The solid was filtered off and the filtrated was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was further purified by silica gel column chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=15:1 to 10:1) to afford methyl 3-benzyloxyisoxazole-5-carboxylate (9.50 g, 40.73 mmol, 81% yield) as a colorless oil. The oil was solidified after standing at 15° C. for 15 hr. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 256.0 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.49-7.41 (m, 5H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 3.97 (s, 3H).

To a solution of methyl 3-benzyloxyisoxazole-5-carboxylate (2.33 g, 9.99 mmol, 1.00 eq) in methanol (50 mL) was added sodium borohydride (756 mg, 19.98 mmol, 2.00 eq) in portions. The resulting mixture was stirred at 15° C. for 3 hours. The mixture was poured into hydrochloric acid (0.2 M, 200 mL), and then extracted with ethyl acetate (150 mL×2). The combined organic layers were washed with saturated brine (200 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum to afford (3-benzyloxyisoxazol-5-yl)methanol (1.85 g, 9.02 mmol, 90% yield) as colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 206.0 [M+1] + .

To a solution of cyanic bromide (334 mg, 3.15 mmol, 1.05 eq) and triphenylphosphine (787 mg, 3.00 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added a solution of (3-benzyl oxyisoxazol-5-yl)methanol (616 mg, 3.00 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dichloromethane (10 mL). The mixture was stirred at 15° C. for 1 hour, then 2,3,4,6,7,8,9,10-octahydropyrimido [1,2-a]azepine (480 mg, 3.15 mmol, 1.05 eq) was added at 0° C. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0˜15° C. for another 14 hours. The solvent was concentrated in vacuum. The residue was further purified by silica gel column chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=5:1 to 4:1) to afford 2-(3-benzyloxyisoxazol-5-yl)acetonitrile (320 mg, 1.49 mmol, 50% yield) as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 215.0 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.48-7.41 (m, 5H), 6.06 (s, 1H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 3.82 (s, 2H).

To a solution of 2-(3-benzyloxyisoxazol-5-yl)acetonitrile (214 mg, 1.00 mmol, 1.00 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (3 mL) was added potassium carbonate (138 mg, 1.00 mmol, 1.00 eq). The mixture was stirred at 15° C. for half an hour, then 2-iodopropane (170 mg, 1.00 mmol, 1.00 eq) was added. The resulting mixture was stirred at 15° C. for another 2.5 hr. Then potassium; 2-methylpropan-2-olate (90 mg, 0.8 mmol, 0.80 eq) was added to the mixture, the mixture was stirred at 15° C. for another 12 hours. The mixture was poured into hydrochloric acid (0.2 M, 30 mL), then extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=10:1 to 8:1) to afford 2-(3-benzyloxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanenitrile (150 mg, 0.56 mmol, 59% yield) as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.48-7.41 (m, 5H), 6.04 (s, 1H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 3.85 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 2.42-2.37 (m, 1H), 1.18 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.10 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of 2-(3-benzyloxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanenitrile (3.40 g, 13.27 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dioxane (30 mL) was added hydrochloric acid (11.8 M, 120 mL). The mixture was heated to 100° C. and stirred at 100° C. for 15 hr. The mixture was cooled to 15° C., and then extracted with ethyl acetate (150 mL×3). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The crude product was further purified by prep-HPLC to afford 2-(3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanoic acid (230 mg, 1.19 mmol, 9% yield) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 186.1 [M+1] + .

To a solution of 2-(3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanoic acid (1 g, 5.40 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (10 mL) was added thionyl chloride (2.57 g, 21 mmol, 1.57 mL, 4 eq) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 3 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with water (50 ml) and extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (80 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. Methyl 2-(3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanoate (1 g, 5.02 mmol, 92% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 200.1 [M+1] + .

Exemplary Synthesis of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

To a solution of 1-(4-bromo-2-hydroxy-phenyl)ethanone (10 g, 46.50 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dimethyl formamide (50 mL) was added potassium carbonate (9.64 g, 69.75 mmol, 1.5 eq). Then iodomethane (13.20 g, 93.00 mmol, 2.0 eq) was added into the mixture at 0° C. Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (200 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (100 ml×3), washed with brine (50 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. 1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethanone (10.5 g, 45.84 mmol, 98% yield) was obtained as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 230.9 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.63 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.18-7.11 (m, 2H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 2.60 (s, 3H).

To a solution of 1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethanone (10 g, 43.65 mmol, 1.18 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (50 mL) was added Tetraethyl titanate (16.94 g, 74.26 mmol, 2.0 eq). Then 2-methylpropane-2-sulfinamide (4.5 g, 37.13 mmol, 1.0 eq) was added into the mixture and purged with N 2 (3 times). Then the mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 12 hours. The mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), diluted with water (200 mL), filtered and then extracted with ethyl acetate (200 ml×3), washed with brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (petroleum ether: ethyl acetate=20:1 to 3:1). (NE)-N-[1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethylidene]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (9 g, 27.09 mmol, 73% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.35 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (dd, J=1.2, 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 2.70 (s, 3H), 1.35-1.28 (m, 9H).

To a solution of (NE)-N-[1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethylidene]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (9 g, 27.09 mmol, 1.0 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (90 mL) was added L-selectride (1 M, 81.26 mL, 3.0 eq) at 0° C. Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), diluted with water (20 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (300 mL×3), washed with brine (200 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (petroleum ether:ethyl acetate=20:1 to 1:1). N-[(1S)-1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (5.5 g, 16.45 mmol, 60% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.20-7.16 (m, 1H), 7.12-7.07 (m, 1H), 7.02 (d, J=2.0 Hz, 1H), 4.90-4.82 (m, 1H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 3.50 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 1.52 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.21 (s, 9H).

Step 4: Preparation of (R)-N-((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenyl)ethyl)-2-methylpropane-2-sulfinamide

To a solution of N-[(1S)-1-(4-bromo-2-methoxy-phenyl)ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (4.7 g, 14.06 mmol, 1.0 eq) and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (5.36 g, 21.09 mmol, 1.5 eq) in dioxane (12 mL) was added [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ii) (1.03 g, 1.41 mmol, 0.1 eq) and potassium acetate (2.76 g, 28.12 mmol, 2.0 eq). Then the mixture was purged with N 2 (3 times). Then the mixture was stirred at 90° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL), filtered and then extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×3), washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (petroleum ether:ethyl acetate=10:1 to 1:1). N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)phenyl]ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (4.5 g, 11.80 mmol, 84% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.42 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.28 (m, 2H), 4.90 (m, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.73-3.67 (m, 1H), 1.55 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.36 (s, 12H), 1.19 (s, 9H).

Step 5: Preparation of (R)-N-((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)-2-methylpropane-2-sulfinamide

To a solution of N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl) phenyl]ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (4.71 g, 12.36 mmol, 1.0 eq) and 5-bromo-4-methyl-thiazole (2.2 g, 12.36 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dioxane (8 mL) and water (2 mL) was added sodium bicarbonate (2.08 g, 24.72 mmol, 2.0 eq) and [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(ii) (904 mg, 1.24 mmol, 0.1 eq). Then the mixture was purged with N 2 (3 times). Then the mixture was stirred at 90° C. for 5 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (20 mL), filtered, extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×3), washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (dichloromethane:methanol=100:1 to 10:1). N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (3.9 g, 11.06 mmol, 89% yield) was obtained as a light yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 7.34 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.03 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (s, 1H), 4.92 (m, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.89 (s, 3H), 3.58 (d, J=5.6 Hz, 1H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 1.57 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 1.22 (s, 9H).

To a solution of N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]-2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinamide (3.6 g, 10.21 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added hydrochloric/dioxane (4 M, 18.46 mL, 7.23 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated. (1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethanamine (3.8 g, HCl) was obtained as a yellow solid.

Step 7: Preparation of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of (1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethanamine (800 mg, 2.25 mmol, 1.0 eq, HCl) in dimethyl formamide (10 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (871 mg, 6.74 mmol, 1.17 mL, 3.0 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 10 minutes. (2S,4R)-1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-4-hydroxy-pyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid (519 mg, 2.25 mmol, 1.0 eq) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (364 mg, 2.70 mmol, 1.2 eq) was added into the mixture and stirred at 20° C. for 10 minutes. Then 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (517 mg, 2.70 mmol, 1.2 eq) was added into the mixture and stirred at 20° C. for 40 minutes. The mixture was diluted with water (30 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (30 ml×3), washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (dichloromethane:methanol=100:1 to 20:1). tert-butyl(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (850 mg, 1.84 mmol, 82% yield) was obtained as a yellow solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.69 (s, 1H), 7.28 (s, 1H), 7.00 (dd, J=1.6, 7.6 Hz, 1H), 6.93 (s, 1H), 5.34-5.21 (m, 1H), 4.59-4.26 (m, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.81-3.53 (m, 2H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.51-2.38 (m, 1H), 2.22-1.94 (m, 1H), 1.57-1.18 (m, 13H).

Step 8: Preparation of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide hydrochloride

To a solution of tert-butyl (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carboxylate (850 mg, 1.84 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dichloromethane (10 mL) was added hydrochloric acid (gas)/dioxane (4 M, 10 mL). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 1 hour. The mixture was concentrated. (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (700 mg, 1.76 mmol, 95% yield, HCl) was obtained as a yellow solid.

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((S)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate and tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((R)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

Step 1: Preparation of methyl 3-methyl-2-(3-((2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11-trioxa-5-azatridecan-13-yl)oxy)isoxazol-5-yl)butanoate

To a solution of methyl 2-(3-hydroxyisoxazol-5-yl)-3-methyl-butanoate (500 mg, 2.51 mmol, 1.0 eq) and 2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl4-methylbenzenesulfonate (1.05 g, 2.51 mmol, 1.0 eq) in dimethylformamide (10 mL) was added potassium carbonate (1.04 g, 7.53 mmol, 3.0 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 70° C. for 48 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (50 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×3), washed with brine (50 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography silica (petroleum ether:ethyl acetate=10:1 to 1:1). methyl 2-[3-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy] isoxazol-5-yl]-3-methyl-butanoate (650 mg, 1.46 mmol, 58% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 5.93 (s, 1H), 4.44-4.37 (m, 2H), 3.88-3.83 (m, 2H), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.72-3.60 (m, 6H), 3.50 (d, J=8.8 Hz, 1H), 3.41 (br s, 2H), 2.92 (s, 3H), 2.37 (m, J=6.8, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 1.47 (s, 9H), 1.01 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.93 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

Step 2: Preparation of 3-methyl-2-(3-((2,2,5-trimethyl-4-oxo-3,8,11-trioxa-5-azatridecan-13-yl)oxy)isoxazol-5-yl)butanoic acid

To a solution of methyl 2-[3-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy] ethoxy]ethoxy]isoxazol-5-yl]-3-methyl-butanoate (630 mg, 1.42 mmol, 1.0 eq) in methanol (4 mL) and water (2 mL) was added lithium hydroxide monohydrate (594 mg, 14.17 mmol, 10.0 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was quenched with aqueous hydrochloric (4M, 3 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×3), washed with brine (20 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. 2-[3-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]isoxazol-5-yl]-3-methyl-butanoic acid (600 mg, 1.39 mmol, 98% yield) was obtained as a yellow oil.

Step 3: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-(1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

To a solution of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-N-[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]pyrrolidine-2-carboxamide (369 mg, 0.93 mmol, 1.0 eq, HCl) in dimethylformamide (5 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (360 mg, 2.79 mmol, 3.0 eq). Then the mixture was stirred at 20° C. for 10 min. 2-[3-[2-[2-[2-[tert-butoxycarbonyl(methyl)amino]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]isoxazol-5-yl]-3-methyl-butanoic acid (400 mg, 0.93 mmol, 1.0 eq) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (251 mg, 1.86 mmol, 2.0 eq) were added into the mixture and stirred at 20° C. for 10 minutes. Then 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (356 mg, 1.86 mmol, 2.0 eq) was added into the mixture and stirred at 20° C. for 40 minutes. The mixture was diluted with water (30 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (30 mL×2), washed with brine (30 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and then concentrated. The residue was purified by prep-thin layer chromatography (dichloromethane:methanol=10:1). tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[5-[1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl]-2-methyl-propyl]isoxazol-3-yl]oxyethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (490 mg, 0.63 mmol, 67% yield, 99% purity) was obtained as a white solid.

Step 4: Preparation of tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((S)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate and tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((R)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate

Tert-butyl N-[2-[2-[2-[5-[1-[(2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-[[(1S)-1-[2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl]ethyl]carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-1-carbonyl]-2-methyl-propyl]isoxazol-3-yl]oxyethoxy]ethoxy]ethyl]-N-methyl-carbamate (490 mg, 0.63 mmol, 1.0 eq) was separated by SFC. The organic layers were concentrated. tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((S)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate (190 mg, 0.24 mmol, 95% yield, 98% purity) was obtained as a white solid. tert-butyl (2-(2-(2-((5-((R)-1-((2S,4R)-4-hydroxy-2-(((S)-1-(2-methoxy-4-(4-methylthiazol-5-yl)phenyl)ethyl)carbamoyl)pyrrolidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutan-2-yl)isoxazol-3-yl)oxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethyl)(methyl)carbamate (250 mg, 0.32 mmol, 84% yield, 99% purity) was obtained as a white solid.

Exemplary Synthesis of 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)naphthalen-2-ol

To a solution of 4-bromonaphthalen-2-ol (220 mg, 0.99 mmol, 1 eq) and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1,3,2-dioxaborolane (326 mg, 1.28 mmol, 1.3 eq) in dimethylformamide (20 mL) was added [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II).dichloromethane (80 mg, 0.1 mmol, 0.1 eq) and potassium acetate (242 mg, 2.47 mmol, 2.5 eq), and then the mixture was stirred at 90° C. under nitrogen for 5 hours. The mixture was diluted with water (50 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), the organic phase was dried by anhydrous, filtered and the filtrate was condensed to give crude product. This crude product was purified by silica gel column chromatography (10-33.3% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to give the product 400 mg as a white solid, this product was further purified by prep-TLC (50% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to give 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)naphthalen-2-ol (180 mg, 0.67 mmol, 67% yield) as a white solid. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 8.67 (d, J=8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.72-7.66 (m, 2H), 7.46-7.35 (m, 2H), 7.28-7.27 (m, 1H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 1.43 (s, 12H).

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-2-(((R)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)oxy)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To solution of (2R)-2-benzyloxypropanoic acid (20.00 g, 110.99 mmol, 1.00 eq) in methanol (150 mL) was cooled to 0° C., then sulfurous dichloride (39.61 g, 332.96 mmol, 24.2 mL, 3.00 eq) was added dropwise. The mixture was then stirred at 50° C. for 4 hours. The reaction mixture concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was diluted with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (200 mL), then extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the product, methyl (2R)-2-benzyloxypropanoate (21.96 g) as a yellow oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 217.1 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.40-7.27 (m, 5H), 4.70 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 4.46 (d, J=11.6 Hz, 1H), 4.08 (q, J=6.8 Hz, 1H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 1.45 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

A solution of methyl (2R)-2-benzyloxypropanoate (20.96 g, 107.92 mmol, 1.00 eq) in dichloromethane (200 mL) was cooled to −78° C., then diisobutylaluminum hydride (1 M, 110 mL, 1.00 eq) was added in dropwise. The mixture was then stirred at −78° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was quenched with hydrochloric acid (1 M, 10 mL), filtered through celite. The filtrate was diluted with water (100 mL), then extracted with dichloromethane (100 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. Compound (2R)-2-benzyloxypropanal (15.70 g) was obtained as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 181.1 [M+17] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 9.68 (d, J=1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.42-7.33 (m, 5H), 4.68-4.60 (m, 2H), 3.95-3.86 (m, 1H), 1.34 (d, J=6.8 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of (2R)-2-benzyloxypropanal (14.70 g, 89.52 mmol, 1 eq) in trimethoxymethane (71.15 g, 670.46 mmol, 73.5 mL, 7.49 eq) was added 4-methylbenzenesulfonic acid; pyridine (450 mg, 1.79 mmol, 0.02 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with water (100 mL), then extracted with ethyl acetate (100 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (petroleum ether/ethyl acetate=25/1 to 20/1) to give desired product. Compound [(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]methylbenzene (16.70 g, 79.42 mmol, 89% yield, 100% purity) was obtained as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 233.1 [M+23] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.39-7.27 (m, 5H), 4.68-4.61 (m, 2H), 4.22 (d, J=5.2 Hz, 1H), 3.62-3.53 (m, 1H), 3.44 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 6H), 1.20 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 3H).

To a solution of [(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]methylbenzene (9.00 g, 42.80 mmol, 1.00 eq) in methanol (80 mL) was added palladium on activated carbon (500 mg, 5% purity) and palladium hydroxide (500 mg, 5% purity) under nitrogen gas. The suspension was degassed under vacuum and purged with hydrogen gas several times. The mixture was stirred under hydrogen gas (15 psi) at 60° C. for 8 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. Compound (2R)-1,1-dimethoxypropan-2-ol (4.1 g) was obtained as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 4.08 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 1H), 3.81-3.73 (m, 1H), 3.45 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 6H), 1.20 (d, J=6.4 Hz, 3H).

Step 5: Preparation of tert-butyl (R)-4-(7-bromo-6-chloro-2-((1,1-dimethoxypropan-2-yl)oxy)-8-fluoroquinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

Tert-butyl 4-(7-bromo-2,6-dichloro-8-fluoro-quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate (300 mg, 0.62 mmol, 1 eq), (2R)-1,1-dimethoxypropan-2-ol (150.13 mg, 1.25 mmol, 2 eq), potassium carbonate (259 mg, 1.87 mmol, 3 eq) and 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (7 mg, 62.48 umol, 0.1 eq) were taken up into a microwave tube in acetonitrile (10 mL). The sealed tube was heated at 100° C. for 2 hours under microwave. The reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under vacuum to get the residue. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (0-15% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to get tert-butyl 4-[7-bromo-6-chloro-2-[(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]-8-fluoro-quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (706 mg, 1.10 mmol, 22% yield, 87% purity) as a yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 565.1 [M+1] + .

Step 6: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-2-(((R)-1,1-dimethoxypropan-2-yl)oxy)-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-[7-bromo-6-chloro-2-[(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]-8-fluoro-quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (608 mg, 1.08 mmol, 1 eq), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)naphthalen-2-ol (379 mg, 1.40 mmol, 1.3 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (15 mL) was added potassium phosphate (1.5 M, 2.16 mL, 3 eq) and (2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropyl-1,1′-biphenyl)[2-(2′-amino-1,1′-biphenyl)]palladium(ii) methanesulfonate (91 mg, 0.11 mmol, 0.1 eq). The reaction mixture was degassed and charged with nitrogen for 3 times and then heated to 65° C. for 16 hours. Ethyl acetate (30 mL) was added and the mixture was washed with water (30 mL). The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get the residue. The residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (0-60% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether) to get the crude product (600 mg). This crude product was purified by semi-preparative reverse phase HPLC. The collected fractions were concentrated under vacuum to remove most of the acetonitrile. The pH of the mixture was adjusted to 8 with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate and then extracted with ethyl acetate (50 mL×2). The combined organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-2-[(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (400 mg) as a light yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 627.2 [M+1] + .

Step 7: Preparation of (2R)-2-((6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-4-(piperazin-1-yl)quinazolin-2-yl)oxy)propanal

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-2-[(1R)-2,2-dimethoxy-1-methyl-ethoxy]-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (400 mg, 0.64 mmol, 1 eq) in dioxane (20 mL) was added hydrochloric acid (12 M, 2.00 mL, 37.63 eq). The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum to get (2R)-2-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)-4-piperazin-1-yl-quinazolin-2-yl]oxypropanal (330 mg, hydrochloride) as a light yellow gum. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 481.1 [M+1] + .

Step 8: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxynaphthalen-1-yl)-2-(((R)-1-oxopropan-2-yl)oxy)quinazolin-4-yl)piperazine-1-carboxylate

A mixture of (2R)-2-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)-4-piperazin-1-yl-quinazolin-2-yl]oxypropanal (330 mg, 0.64 mmol, 1 eq, hydrochloride) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (278.41 mg, 1.28 mmol, 2 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) was cooled to 0° C. Then saturated aqueous sodium sulfate (322 mg, 3.83 mmol, 6 mL, 6 eq) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. Ethyl acetate (30 mL) and water (20 mL) were added and the mixture was separated. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and then concentrated under vacuum to get the residue. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography with dichloromethane (50 mL) then ethyl acetate (40 mL) to get tert-butyl 4-[6-chloro-8-fluoro-7-(3-hydroxy-1-naphthyl)-2-[(1R)-1-methyl-2-oxo-ethoxy]quinazolin-4-yl]piperazine-1-carboxylate (380 mg) as a light yellow solid. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 581.2 [M+1] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 9.71 (dd, J=1.8, 3.4 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J=1.1 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (dt, J=1.5, 7.3 Hz, 1H), 7.33-7.27 (m, 2H), 7.27-7.22 (m, 1H), 7.10 (d, J=2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.32-5.88 (m, 1H), 5.30-5.22 (m, 1H), 3.99-3.77 (m, 4H), 3.74-3.61 (m, 4H), 1.59-1.54 (m, 3H), 1.52 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-(2-(tosyloxy)ethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of 2-benzyloxyethanol (50 g, 328.54 mmol, 46.73 mL, 1 eq) and potassium hydroxide (22.12 g, 394.24 mmol, 1.2 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (200 mL) was added toluenesulfonyl chloride (56.37 g, 295.68 mmol, 0.9 eq). The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. Ethyl acetate (1000 mL) was added, then the reaction was filtered, then the filtrate was washed by brine (200 mL), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=5:1 to 3:1). Compound 2-benzyloxyethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (75 g, 243.82 mmol, 74% yield, 99% purity) was obtained as a yellow oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.85-7.79 (m, 2H), 7.38-7.31 (m, 4H), 7.30-7.26 (m, 2H), 7.31 (s, 1H), 4.51 (s, 2H), 4.26-4.19 (m, 2H), 3.73-3.65 (m, 2H), 2.50-2.40 (m, 3H).

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-1-carboxylate (10.35 g, 51.41 mmol, 1.05 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (150 mL) was added sodium cyanide (2.15 g, 53.86 mmol, 60% purity, 1.1 eq) at 0° C. stirred at 0.5 hour, 2-benzyloxyethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (15 g, 48.96 mmol, 1 eq) was added. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. Ammonium chloride solution (200 mL) was added, and then the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate (200 mL*3). The combined organic phase was washed with brine (100 mL*2), dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuum. The residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=10:1 to 4:1). Compound tert-butyl 4-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate (14.5 g) was obtained as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 236.1 [M−100] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.41-7.30 (m, 5H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 3.80 (br d, J=9.9 Hz, 2H), 3.71-3.62 (m, 4H), 3.55-3.46 (m, 1H), 3.08 (ddd, J=3.5, 9.5, 13.3 Hz, 2H), 1.86 (br d, J=7.9 Hz, 2H), 1.60-1.50 (m, 2H), 1.47 (s, 9H).

To a solution of tert-butyl 4-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate (5 g, 14.91 mmol, 1 eq) in methanol (40 mL) was added palladium on activated carbon (0.5 g, 10% purity) under nitrogen. The suspension was degassed under vacuum and purged with H 2 several times. The mixture was stirred under hydrogen (15 psi) at 25° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under vacuum. Compound tert-butyl 4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate (3 g, 12.23 mmol, 82% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 3.86-3.72 (m, 4H), 3.66-3.58 (m, 2H), 3.56-3.45 (m, 1H), 3.16-3.07 (m, 2H), 2.15-2.05 (m, 1H), 1.96-1.78 (m, 2H), 1.59-1.49 (m, 2H), 1.47 (s, 9H).

To a mixture of tert-butyl 4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate (7.4 g, 30.17 mmol, 1 eq) and triethylamine (9.16 g, 90.50 mmol, 12.60 mL, 3 eq) in dichloromethane (70 mL) was added toluenesulfonyl chloride (8.63 g, 45.25 mmol, 1.5 eq) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 12 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (Petroleum ether:Ethyl acetate=4:1 to 1:1). Compound tert-butyl 4-[2-(p-tolylsulfonyloxy)ethoxy]piperidine-1-carboxylate (8.7 g, 21.78 mmol, 72% yield) as a yellow oil was obtained. 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.80 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 2H), 7.34 (d, J=8.1 Hz, 2H), 4.18-4.13 (m, 2H), 3.76-3.70 (m, 2H), 3.67-3.60 (m, 4H), 3.47-3.39 (m, 1H), 3.14-3.01 (m, 2H), 2.46-2.43 (m, 3H), 1.90-1.78 (m, 2H), 1.45 (s, 9H).

Exemplary Synthesis of tert-butyl 4-(2-(2-(2-(1,3-dioxoisoindolin-2-yl)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate

To a solution of 2-[2-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethanol (18.2 g, 75.74 mmol, 1 eq) and potassium hydroxide (12.75 g, 227.22 mmol, 3 eq) in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) was stirred at 25° C. for 0.5 hour, then p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (28.88 g, 151.48 mmol, 2 eq) was added and stirred at 25° C. for 1 hour. The reaction mixture was quenched by water (100 mL) at 25° C., and extracted with Ethyl acetate (200 mL*3). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (150 mL*2), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (0-10% ethyl aetate in petroleum ether). Compound 2-[2-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (20 g, 50.70 mmol, 66.9% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil.

Step 2: Preparation of tert-butyl 4-(2-(2-(2-(benzyloxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)ethoxy)piperidine-1-carboxylate

To the mixture of tert-butyl 4-hydroxypiperidine-1-carboxylate (8.42 g, 41.83 mmol, 1.1 eq) in N,N-dimethylformamide (150 mL) was added sodium hydride (1.75 g, 43.73 mmol, 60% in mineral oil, 1.15 eq) at 0° C. Then it was stirred at 25° C. for 0.5 hour. Then 2-[2-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate (15 g, 38.02 mmol, 1 eq) was added to the mixture. The mixture was stirred at 25° C. for 2 hours. The mixture was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride solution (350 mL). Then it was extracted with ethyl acetate (150 mL×3). The combined organic layer was washed with water (200 mL×2) and brine (200 mL×2), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure to give a residue. The residue was purified by gel silica chromatography (petroleum ether:ethyl acetate=10:1 to 3:1). Compound tert-butyl 4-[2-[2-(2-benzyloxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]piperidine-1-carboxylate (11.8 g, 27.86 mmol, 73.27% yield) was obtained as a colorless oil. LC/MS (ESI) m/z: 324.1 [M−99] + ; 1 H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl 3 ) δ 7.35-7.28 (m, 5H), 4.57-4.56 (m, 2H), 3.84-3.75 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.63 (m, 12H), 3.50-3.45 (m, 1H), 3.07-3.02 (m, 2H), 1.83-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.53-1.45 (m, 11H).

To the mixture of tert-but